You are on page 1of 421

Associative Parametric Design

Student Guide
May 25, 2007
MT10040 NX 5

Publication Number
mt10040_g NX 5

Manual History

Manual
Revision

Versions
NX 5

Publication
Date
May 2007

Proprietary and restricted rights notice


This software and related documentation are proprietary to UGS Corp.
Copyright 2007 UGS Corp. All Rights Reserved.
All trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

mt10040_g NX 5

Contents

Course Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Course Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . .
Workbook Overview . . . . . . . . .
Help Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Learning Advantage . . . . .
Class Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Student Responsibilities . . . . .
Part Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layers and Categories . . . . . . .
Classroom System Information
Roles and Customizing . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 9
. 9
10
10
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
14
15
16

Assembly Cloning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1


Assembly Cloning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Parts to Include in the Cloning Operation
Cloning Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reports to Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Default Clone Action Exceptions . . . . . . .
Naming Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Options on the Main Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conflict Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Teamcenter Integration Unique Options . . . . . . . .
Activity: Cloning an Existing Assembly . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1-2
. 1-4
. 1-5
. 1-6
. 1-7
. 1-8
. 1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-17

Assembly Sequencing and Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


General Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequencing Task Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly Sequencing and Motion Toolbar
Assembly Sequencing Playback . . . . . . . .
Sequence Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence Navigator Symbols . . . . . . . . . .
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-7
2-8
2-9
3

Contents

Pop-up Menus, Columns, and Details . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Procedure: Creating a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure: Sequence Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Editing the Sequencing of the Vise Assembly
Assembly Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Record Component Motion Dialog Bar . . . . . . . . .
Motion Record Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Creating a New Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2-10
2-12
2-15
2-16
2-23
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-41

Documenting Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1


Defining Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Documentation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layers and Categories . . . . . . . . .
Feature Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expression Names and Comments
Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feature Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Creating Feature Sets . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 3-2
. 3-3
. 3-4
. 3-5
. 3-6
. 3-7
. 3-8
. 3-9
3-10
3-14
3-18

Part Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1


Feature and Object Associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Dependency Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feature Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing the Display of the Part Navigator
Expression Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Model Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 4-2
. 4-3
. 4-4
. 4-5
. 4-7
4-10
4-11
4-17

Editing Parametric Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1


Reordering Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reordering Features with the Part Navigator . . . . . . . . .
Procedure: Reordering Features with the Part Navigator
The Reorder Feature Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure: Reorder Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Reordering Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting Features in the Feature List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replace Features dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Inserting and Replacing Features . . . . . . . . . .
Suppress by Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 5-2
. 5-3
. 5-4
. 5-5
. 5-6
. 5-7
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-16
5-21

mt10040_g NX 5

Contents

Suppress by Expression Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Uses of Suppress by Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Suppressing Features with Expressions .
When Model Updates Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Out of Date Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part navigator Status column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventing the Deletion of Child Features . . . . . .
Modeling for Editing Flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Replacing Defining Strings and Surfaces
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

5-22
5-23
5-24
5-29
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-36
5-40

Associative Curve Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1


Associativity of Curve Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage Considerations for the Associate Option .
Procedure: Create Project Curves . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Project Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Join Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure: Create Join Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Join Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intersection Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure: Create Intersection Curve . . . . . . . .
Activity: Intersection Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrap/Unwrap Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure: Wrap/Unwrap Curves . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Wrap Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sketch Projected Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure: Creating Projected Curves in Sketch
Sketch Offset Projected Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure: Creating Projected Curves in Sketch
Activity: Project Curves in a Sketch . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 6-2
. 6-3
. 6-4
. 6-5
. 6-6
. 6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-21
6-22
6-24
6-25
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-30
6-31
6-32
6-33
6-40

General Pockets and Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1


General Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Pocket Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Creating a Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Creating a Pocket with Multiple Floor Faces
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

. 7-2
. 7-4
. 7-5
. 7-7
. 7-8
7-11

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

Contents

General Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Pad Dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Creating General Pad and Pocket .
Editing General Pads and Pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure: Editing General Pad and Pockets
Activity: Editing General Pockets and Pads .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

7-14
7-15
7-16
7-24
7-25
7-26
7-29

Blending Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1


Edge Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Rolling Ball Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edge Blend Dialog Box Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure: Create Constant Radius Edge Blends
Activity: Blends on Adjacent Edges . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Blending Multiple Edges . . . . . . . . . . .
Overflow Resolutions and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roll Over Smooth Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roll On Edges (Smooth or Sharp) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintain Blend and Move Sharp Edges . . . . . . .
Explicit Overflow Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Settings Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Blend Overflow Options . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Vertices Overflow Option . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When To Use Face Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Blend Dialog Box Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Blend Attachment Methods . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Face Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Face Blending and Tangency Control . .
Activity: Redefining Blended Edges . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 8-2
. 8-5
. 8-6
. 8-7
. 8-8
8-12
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-21
8-23
8-26
8-29
8-30
8-31
8-33
8-34
8-40
8-43
8-45

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1


NX Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gateway Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Expressions Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modeling Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spreadsheet NX Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extracting Expressions and Updating the NX Part
Active Expression Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Spreadsheet Data and Returning to NX . .
Workflow: Using the Modeling Spreadsheet . . . . .
Activity: Timing Gear Spreadsheet (Excel) . . . . . .
Built-in Spreadsheet Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mass Properties Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 9-2
. 9-3
. 9-4
. 9-6
. 9-7
. 9-8
. 9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-17
9-18

mt10040_g NX 5

Contents

Activity: Mass Properties in a Spreadsheet (Excel) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21


Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Design Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Goal Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Goal Seek Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Goal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Optimizing a Part for Volume
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

. 10-2
. 10-3
. 10-8
10-10
10-15

Defining Part and Assembly Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1


Creating Variations of a Piece Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Simple Variation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure: Creating a Template Part . . . . . . . .
Activity: Part Variations in a Spreadsheet . . . .
Using Table Lookup Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Variations with Lookup Functions . . .
Suppressing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suppress Components by Expression . . . . . . . .
Activity: Suppressing Comp. with Expressions
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 11-2
. 11-3
. 11-4
. 11-5
. 11-8
. 11-9
11-12
11-13
11-14
11-18

Design Intent and Model Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1


Activity: Incorporating Design Intent into a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Deform Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Using Flexible Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deformable Parts dialog (NX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deforming a Component in the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Making a Part Deformable . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Adding Deformable Parts to an Assembly
Activity: Deforming a Part Using a Guide String .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
..
..

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

B-2
B-3
B-4
B-5
B-8
B-16
B-19

Assembly Part Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1


Managing Assembly Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Activity: Creating an Assembly Part Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Microsoft Excel Add-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precedence and Associativity
Built-in Functions . . . . . . . .
Scientific Notation . . . . . . . .
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

D-2
D-3
D-4
D-5
7

Contents

Spreadsheet Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1


Differences Between Xess and Excel .
Migrating Spreadsheet Data . . . . . . .
Extended Functionality . . . . . . . . . .
Vector-Related Functions . . . .
Matrix functions . . . . . . . . . .
Point-Related Functions . . . .
Expression-Related Functions
Object-Related Functions . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

E-2
E-3
E-4
E-5
E-7
E-8
E-9
E-10

Introduction to the NX SpreadsheetXess Activities . . . . . . . . . . F-1


Activity: Timing Gear Spreadsheet (Xess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Activity: Mass Properties in a Spreadsheet (Xess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
Defining Part and Assembly VariationsXess Activities . . . . . . . G-1
Activity: Part Variations in a Spreadsheet (Xess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
Activity: Variations with Lookup Functions (Xess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
Activity: Suppressing Comp. with Expressions (Xess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-8
Assembly Part FamiliesXess Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
Activity: Creating an Assembly Part Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Course Overview
Course Description
The Associative Parametric Design course is targeted at NX users who
want to leverage more of the parametric capabilities of NX in their design
processes. Topics include the use of modeling functionality and techniques,
associative curve operations, spreadsheet, assembly configurations, and
assembly cloning.

Objectives
After successfully completing this course, you should be able to perform the
following activities in NX:

Clone an assembly

Document design intent

Interrogate the features and expressions in a part

Apply associative curve and sketch operations

Create feature sets

Create face blends

Manage expressions with a spreadsheet

Optimize a design using a spreadsheet

Manage and update assembly configurations with a spreadsheet

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

Course Description

Intended Audience
Designers, Engineers, and CAD/CAM Managers who wish to apply more
parametric modeling capabilities of NX to capture design intent or create
"seed" assemblies to define assembly configurations.

Prerequisites

10

Essentials for NX Designers course or CAST equivalent (NX)

Intermediate Design and Assemblies course or CAST equivalent (NX) or:

Sketcher NX (if you took Essentials for NX Designers and Intermediate


Design and Assemblies in pre-NX) and:

Working knowledge of:

Assemblies

Sketching

Feature-based solid modeling

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Course Overview

How to Use This Manual


It is important that you use the Student Guide in the sequence presented
because later lessons assume you have learned concepts and techniques
taught in an earlier lesson. If necessary, you can always refer to any previous
activity where a method or technique was originally taught.
The format of the activities is consistent throughout this manual. Steps are
labeled and specify what will be accomplished at any given point in the
activity. Below each step are action boxes which emphasize the individual
actions that must be taken to accomplish the step. As your knowledge of NX
increases, the action boxes will seem redundant as the step text becomes all
that is needed to accomplish a given task.
Step 1:

This is an example of a step.


This is an example of an action box.

Always read the Cue and Status lines.


The general format for lesson content is:

presentation

activity

project

summary

We recommend that you:

Ask questions.

Confirm with restatement.

Attend and pay attention to instruction as it is given.

Please be considerate of other students who may have greater or lesser needs
for instruction. Instructors cannot possibly meet the exact needs of every
student.
At the start of each class day you will be expected to log onto your terminal
and start NX, be ready to follow the instructors curriculum. At the end of the
days class you should always quit NX and log off the terminal.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

11

How to Use This Manual

Workbook Overview
The workbook is your opportunity to test your new skills in the context of a
simulated work environment. The workbook contains projects based on the
concepts and practices presented in the Student Guide.
The activities allow you to apply the skills taught in this course. Feel free
to enlist the help of your instructor.

Help Library
The NX Help Library is available online any time you need more information
about a function. To access the NX Help Library; from the NX menu
bar choose HelpDocumentation, or HelpOn Line Docuemtation.
Throughout this course specific online help paths will be displayed to help
you locate additional information.
The path names will be displayed in the following manner.
See Also: GatewayCustomer Defaults.

The Learning Advantage


UGS Education Services offers a blend of training solutions for all of
our product lifecycle management products. Our Online Store, Learning
Advantage, was developed to provide our customers with just in time training
for the latest in application developments.
Here are some of the Learning Advantages:

Direct access to the training material

Presented in a self-paced learning environment

Online assessments to measure your success

Just in time training for the latest software releases

For more information about the Learning Advantage visit our web site
http://training.ugs.com or E-mail us at training@ugs.com.

12

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Course Overview

Class Standards
The following standards will be used in this class. Standardization allows
users to work with others parts while being able to predict the organization of
the part. All work should be performed in accordance with these standards.

Student Responsibilities

Be on time.

Participate in class.

Stick with the subject matter.

Listen attentively and take notes.

Practice on the job what you have learned.

Have fun.

Part Naming
You will occasionally be asked to enter a new part name for projects that
should be saved for later use. Use your initials as a prefix to the existing part
name and save the part in your home directory
Seed Part

Seed parts are an effective tool for establishing customer defaults or any
settings that are part-dependent (saved with the part). This may include
non-geometric data such as:

Sketch preferences

Layer categories

User-defined views and layouts

Part attributes
Once a seed part is established, it should be write-protected to avoid
accidental modification of the seed part.

Two seed part files are available for use in this course. These files incorporate
the standards described above, and include the TFR-TRI view as the default
view.

apd_seedpart_inch.prt (Inches)

apd_seedpart_mm.prt (Millimeters)
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

13

Class Standards

Layers and Categories


The following layer and category standards will be followed in this class.
Model Geometry

Object Type
Solid Geometry
Inter-part Modeling
Sketch Geometry
Curve Geometry
Reference Geometry
Sheet Bodies

Layer Assignment
120
1520
2140
4160
6180
81100

Category Name
SOLIDS
LINKED_OBJECTS
SKETCHES
CURVES
DATUMS
SHEETS

Drafting Objects

Object Type
Drawing Borders

Layer Assignment
101110

Category Name
FORMATS

Engineering Disciplines

Object Type
Mechanism Tools
Finite Element Meshes
and Engr. Tools

14

Layer Assignment
121130

Category Name

131150

MECH
CAE

Manufacturing

151180

MFG

Quality Tools

181190

QA

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Course Overview

Classroom System Information


Your instructor will provide you with the following items for working in the
classroom:
Student Login:
User name:

Password:

Work Directory:

Parts Directory:

Instructor:

Date:

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

15

Class Standards

Roles and Customizing


This course was designed to use the Advanced with Full Menus role.
Roles
NX has many advanced capabilities, but while
learning you may want to use a smaller set of tools.

As you progress you may want to use more functions.

Roles tailor your interface by hiding tools you are unlikely to use in a given
role.
The role you choose affects the number of icons that appear on toolbars, and
the number of pull-down menu items you will see.
Choosing a Role
To activate a role:

16

Open the Roles palette on the resource bar

Click the role you want.

Acknowledge the warning message.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Course Overview

Customize
NX provides customization tools to fine tune your interface.
You can:

Change the size of icons displayed on menus and toolbars


optionally display text below icons on toolbars
remove tools you never use
move tools to a different location by dragging them

To add a command to a menu or toolbar:

Click MB3 on any blank toolbar area.


Choose Customize (last choice at the bottom of the list)
On the Commands page, select a menu or toolbar in the left window.
Drag a command from the right window to a toolbar or menu.

Some menu items are hidden by default. We say these items are below the
fold. You can set menus to always display all choices on the Options page of
the Customize dialog.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

17

Class Standards

Set the Role for this Course

This role configures the toolbars and menus as they were used in designing
this course.
Step 1:

Set the Advanced with Full Menus role.


On the NX resource bar, click Roles

Expand the System Defaults area of the palette.

Choose Advanced with Full Menus

Click OK to acknowledge the warning message.


Step 2:

Add the Application toolbar.


Choose ToolsCustomize.
On the Toolbar page, select the Application check box.
Close the Customize dialog.
The option you just activated will stay in effect throughout the
class unless you change them, change role settings, or switch login
identities.

From time to time your instructor may suggest other toolbar buttons
to activate.

18

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Lesson

Assembly Cloning
Purpose
Assembly cloning allows you to create a new assembly that shares a similar
structure with an existing assembly. A new product assembly can be created
by cloning an existing seed assembly with component structure, interpart
expressions, interpart WAVE links, and spreadsheet data. The new assembly
will maintain these interpart associativities and can be further customized
to meet requirements.
Objective
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

Clone an existing assembly.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

1-1

Assembly Cloning

Assembly Cloning
The Create Clone Assembly function provides a useful top-down means to
create, in a single operation, a new assembly that shares similar structure
and associativities with an existing assembly, but has some different
component references. You could, for example, create several versions of an
existing assembly with a core set of common components. Components in
the cloned assemblies can be modified and new components can be added to
meet design requirements.
Cloning requires an Assembly license and will not be available unless
the Assemblies application is running.
Choose AssembliesCloning to access Cloning options.

Create Clone Assembly

Edit Existing Assembly

The Edit Existing Assembly option allows you to edit the component
references in an existing assembly without creating a new assembly.
See Also: DesignAssembliesFunction DetailsAssemblies
MenuCloning

1-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Cloning

You can define defaults that determine what happens to the majority of
the components and specify exceptions for any components that need to be
handled differently.

If you want to check the current mapping between the input and output
assemblies before the cloning is performed, you can generate a report, which
will appear in an Information window.
When you choose Create Clone Assembly, the Clone Assembly dialog box
appears. You should then use the Add Assembly or Add Part option to specify
one (or more) assemblies to clone.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

1-3

Assembly Cloning

Selecting Parts to Include in the Cloning Operation


Add Assembly Lets you select an assembly for the cloning operation.
Components of the selected assembly are included in the cloning operation.
This option may be selected more than once to include multiple assemblies in
the cloning operation.
Add Part Similar to Add Assembly, except that components are not
included in the cloning operation. This option may also be selected more than
once to include multiple parts in the cloning operation.
The Add Part option is useful if you are implementing the master model
concept and have multiple assemblies referencing the same master
model component. If the master model has already been cloned with
one assembly, the other assemblies can be cloned at a later time.
The Load Options tab lets you define the load method and search folders to
apply when you add an assembly to the cloning operation.
There are three options available from the Load Method group of the dialog
box:

As Saved

From Directory

Search Directories
Individual piece parts that are not part of any assembly may be
included in a cloning operation using either the Add Assembly or
Add Part options. This allows you to copy and apply a naming rule
to multiple parts without having to copy, paste, and rename on the
operating system.

1-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Cloning

Cloning Defaults
Default Clone Action Specifies the default action for the components.
This may be set to Clone (clone the original component) or Retain (keep the
original component).
Naming Tab Specifies the default method for naming cloned components.
This may be set to User Name (to manually enter a new name for cloned
components) or Name Rule (to apply a naming rule to cloned components).
Define Naming Rule Lets you define the default naming of the cloned
components by using a naming rule.
If you are running Teamcenter Integration, you can also choose automatic
generation for default naming.
Default Output Directory Allows you to specify a location in the directory
structure where you want cloned parts to appear. If left blank, the parts will
appear in the directory from which you started NX, which would normally be
your home directory.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

1-5

Assembly Cloning

Reports to Information Window


There are three options for generating a report for the Cloned assembly:
Root Parts Only Reports all the top-level assemblies loaded into the
operation. Components are not included in the report.
Terse Reports only the input and output names of the parts.
Full Generates a full report, including what action will be taken with each
seed part and what the new part names will be in the cloned assembly.
The image below is an example of the Terse report type.
Component Part
apd_cap_screw
apd_center_column
apd_column_seed_assm
apd_machine_screw
apd_gasket
apd_machine_bracket
apd_roller
apd_roller_assm
apd_roller_pin
apd_toolplate

1-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

New Part
rlr_cap_screw
rlr_center_column
rlr_column_seed_assm
rlr_machine_screw
rlr_gasket
rlr_machine_bracket
rlr_roller
rlr_roller_assm
rlr_roller_pin
rlr_toolplate

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Cloning

Log Files
After the cloning is performed, a Cloning Log File appears in the Information
window and can be optionally saved to a file. The Cloning Log File
summarizes the activities performed during the cloning operation, including
the mapping from the input to the output assembly. The log file can be saved
and used for a later operation. The Dry Run option, located on the Main tab,
can be used to generate the log file without actually executing the clone.
Dry Run Select this check box to test the cloning operation and generate a
log file without actually creating or saving any new parts.
Specify Output Log File Lets you specify a log file to record the mapping
for the cloning operation. The file will record the same mappings that
are written to the Information window. If you are running Teamcenter
Integration, the log file will be attached as an associated file to the input and
output root assembly (or assemblies).
You may use a previously constructed log file to drive a command line
ug_clone operation. ug_clone is described in appendix F.
Load and Apply Existing Log File Loads a previously saved log file, whose
mapping will be repeated in your cloning operation. You may load more
than one log file, the mappings that each specifies are applied to the current
cloning operation.
You may edit a log file outside of NX, then reload the file to drive a
cloning operation.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

1-7

Assembly Cloning

Defining Default Clone Action Exceptions


Once you define the Default Clone Action and select the assembly you wish
to Clone, you can also define Exceptions to the default rule for individual
components.
There are three options available from the New Action list:

1-8

Retain will bypass the default action and Retain the original component.

Clone will bypass the default action and Clone the selected component.

Replace will bypass the default action and allow you to replace the
selected component with a different component.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Cloning

Naming Exceptions
Similar to the Cloning Exceptions the Naming Exceptions will allow you to
bypass the default naming action for the selected component.
There are two options available from the New Action list:

User Name will bypass the Name Rule default action and allow you to
input a user name for the selected component.

Name Rule will bypass the User Name default action and refer to the
Define Naming Rule for the selected component.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

1-9

Assembly Cloning

Other Options on the Main Tab


Set Defaults Causes the defaults to be applied to all the components that
were not assigned exceptions. This option does not perform the cloning, but
it evaluates the cloning definition to ensure that all required data has been
specified.
Reset Defaults Clears all the values applied when you chose Set Defaults.
Execute Performs the cloning operation. After the operation is complete
the data from the cloning operation is still present, but the output names are
reset to empty. This is useful for cloning the same assembly several times to
different output assemblies.

1-10

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Cloning

Conflict Resolutions
Conflicts occur when a component is given an action that has potential
problems given the actions applied to its parents or children.
The following are possible conflicts that can occur.

If an assembly part is given an action of Retain, its children must also be


retained to maintain the integrity of the original assembly.

If a part containing linked geometry (created with WAVE) is retained, the


part containing the parent geometry must also be retained to maintain
the link.

When a conflicting action is assigned, a message will inform you that other
parts will automatically be assigned a new action to resolve the problem.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

1-11

Assembly Cloning

Teamcenter Integration Unique Options


Several other Clone Assembly options only appear when you run NX with
Teamcenter Integration:

1-12

Owner and Group, in the Clone Defaults section of the dialog

Auto-Gen, a third Clone Number choice (Clone Number is the name of


the Clone Name option in Teamcenter Integration) in the Clone Defaults
section

Non-Master/Associated File Clone, which appears below the Log Files


section

Owner, Part Type, and Show Non-Masters, in the Define Exceptions


section

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Cloning

Activity: Cloning an Existing Assembly


In this activity, you will clone an existing "seed" assembly to create a new
assembly with a similar structure. All of the components will be cloned and
renamed except the fasteners.
Step 1:

Examine the existing assembly.


Open the assembly apd_column_seed_assm.

Open the Assembly Navigator and examine the assembly


structure

This assembly also contains linked geometry and interpart


expressions.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

1-13

Assembly Cloning

Step 2:

Clone the assembly.


Choose StartAssemblies.
Choose AssembliesCloningCreate Clone Assembly.
Click Add Assembly.
Select the part apd_column_seed_assm and click OK.
Click OK to acknowledge the Modified Part warning.
Choose the Naming tab.
Click Define Naming Rule.
Choose Replace for the Naming Rule Type.
Key in apd for the Base String.
Key in your initials for the Add/Replace/Rename string.
Click OK in the Naming Rule dialog box.
Leave the Default Output Directory blank in the Clone
Assembly dialog box so that the cloned parts will appear in
your home directory.

1-14

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Cloning

Choose the Main tab.


Click Set Defaults.
If there are any problems, such as conflicting part names,
you will get an error message.
Select Terse from the middle of the Clone Assembly dialog box.
Click Report to Information Window.
The Information window shows the old name versus the
new name.
Component Part
apd_cap_screw
apd_center_column
apd_column_seed_assm
apd_machine_screw
apd_gasket
apd_machine_bracket
apd_roller
apd_roller_assm
apd_roller_pin
apd_toolplate

New Part
rlr_cap_screw
rlr_center_column
rlr_column_seed_assm
rlr_machine_screw
rlr_gasket
rlr_machine_bracket
rlr_roller
rlr_roller_assm
rlr_roller_pin
rlr_toolplate

Close the Information window.


Click Exceptions.
Select the apd_cap_screw and apd_machine_screw parts.
(You can use the Ctrl key to select multiple non-consecutive
parts.)
From the New Action list, make sure that Retain is selected.
Click Apply and note the change to the actions shown in
parentheses.
Click Cancel to dismiss the Action Exceptions dialog box.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

1-15

Assembly Cloning

Choose the Naming tab.


Click Exceptions.
In the Naming Exceptions dialog box, in the New Naming list,
make sure User Name is selected.
Select apd_column_seed_assm and click Apply.
Ensure that you are in your home directory and key in
***_column_assm and click OK.
On the Naming Exceptions dialog click Cancel to dismiss it..
Choose the Main tab.
From the list in the middle of the dialog box, select Full.
Click Report to Information Window.
Review the report.
Close the Information window.
Select the Dry Run check box.
Click Execute.
If no error messages were generated, close the information
window.
Make sure to clear the Dry Run check box.
Click Execute.
Close the Information window.
Click Close.
Step 3:

Open the cloned assembly.


Choose FileOptionsAssembly Load Options and change
the Load Method to From Search Folders.
Open the part ***_column_assm.
Verify the assembly structure.

Step 4:
1-16

Close all parts without saving.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Cloning

Summary
The cloning function allows you to create a new assembly based on an existing
assembly with a similar structure while maintaining interpart relationships.
In this lesson you:

Created a new assembly from an existing assembly by cloning all


components while retaining the fasteners. All mating conditions, WAVE
geometry links, and interpart expressions were maintained.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

1-17

Lesson

Assembly Sequencing and Motion


Purpose
Assembly Sequencing and Motion will enable you to view an entire assembly
in an installed and functional environment. This can be critical when
modular assemblies are used within a larger assembly structure.
The ability to view component interaction early in the design process can
ensure savings in the production environment
Objectives
On completion of this lesson you will be able to:

Create and edit assembly and disassembly sequences.

Use motion in sequences.

See also: DesignAssembliesSequences and Motion

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-1

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

General Concepts
The Assembly Sequencing functions let you control the order in which an
assembly is assembled and disassembled. You can model and play back
sequence information. You can assemble or disassemble a component in one
step, or you can create motion steps to simulate how the component moves.

Sequence actions can only be performed when the part containing the
sequence is the displayed part.
Steps consist of one or more frames. A frame represents one unit in time, and
it is the smallest division of time in sequencing. When you are creating (or
playing back) a motion, one frame is generated (or played back) for each
movement you see in the graphics window.
When you open Assembly Sequencing you enter the sequencing task
environment. The NX main menu options and the toolbars become optimized
for sequencing (i.e., they contain only options that are useful with sequencing).
Once you start the Assembly application you can access Assembly Sequencing
by choosing AssembliesSequencing or by choosing the Assembly
Sequences icon on the Assemblies toolbar.

To exit the sequencing task environment, click the Finish Sequence icon
on the Assembly Sequencing and Motion toolbar, or choose TaskFinish
Sequencing.

You can assemble components in several ways:

2-2

One at a time

As a group (for example, if you want to add, at the same time, all the bolts
that hold another component in place)

Preassembled (i.e., a small group of components that you assembled


before starting the sequence that you are recording)

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Sequencing Task Environment


When you enter the Sequencing Task Environment the Sequence Navigator is
active on the resource bar in windows (or as a separate window in UNIX). The
Standard, Assembly Sequencing and Motion, Assembly Sequencing Playback,
and Dynamic Collision Detection toolbars become available.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-3

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Standard Toolbar
Finish Sequence exits the sequencing task environment and
returns you to the environment and application you were in when
you entered sequencing.

Create New Sequence The new sequence appears in the Sequence


Navigator and becomes the context sequence.
Set Context Sequence the pull-down list in the toolbar lists the
sorted names of all the sequences in the displayed part. When you
select a name from this list, it becomes the context sequence.
Save will save your assembly.
Print will print a screen shot of your graphics window.
Undo will undo the last full action you performed.
Object Information will allow you to access information regarding
the selected object.

2-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Assembly Sequencing and Motion Toolbar


Insert Motion inserts a motion step in your sequence. When you
choose this option drag handles and icon options appear.

Assemble creates an assemble step in the context sequence for


the selected component. If more than one component is selected,
a step is created for each component in the order in which they
were selected.
Assemble Together lets you create a subgroup within a sequence.
Disassemble creates a disassembly step for the selected
component.
Disassemble Together disassembles a selected subgroup or set
of components.
Record Camera Position creates a camera step. Use this option
if you want to reorient the sequence view during playback, for
example, for a closer view of small components being disassembled
in a larger assembly.
Insert Pause creates a pause step in your sequence.
Extraction Path creates a collision free path sequence step for
selected components, moving them between a start and end
position. A clearance value assures that the motion path for
the selected components avoids collisions with all other visible
components in the view.
Delete removes one or more selected steps from the context
sequence.
Find in Sequence when you choose this option, you can select
components from the graphics window or the Assembly Navigator.
Show All Sequences if this option is toggled on, the Sequence
Navigator shows all existing sequences for your assembly. If Show
All Sequences is toggled off, only the context sequence appears in
the Sequence Navigator.
Capture Arrangement lets you capture the current positions of
your assembly components as an arrangement.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Motion Envelope creates a motion envelope in the displayed part


by sweeping selected objects through consecutive sequence motion
steps.

2-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Assembly Sequencing Playback


The Assembly Sequencing Playback toolbar acts like a standard video
player control. Additionally it has a window at the left that displays and
allows you to manually set the context sequence current frame, and a window
at the right that controls the playback speed.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-7

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Sequence Navigator
The Sequence Navigator gives you a graphical display of the current sequence
(or all sequences) and its steps in a separate window, and provides access to
options for creating and modifying the sequence and steps. It helps you keep
track of where you are in the sequence.

When you create a sequence, the name of the sequence appears at the
top of the Sequence Navigator. Under the sequence name are the current
arrangement for the sequence and up to three folders: Unprocessed, Ignored,
and Preassembled.
When you click on a step, the Details panel shows information about the
selected component or subassembly.

2-8

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Sequence Navigator Symbols


The following list describes icons that appear in the Sequence Navigator:

Sequence
Arrangement
Folder (Ignored / Preassembled)
Component (in a Folder)
Assembling or disassembling a subassembly only affects the
subassembly itself; the subassemblys child components are
not assembled or disassembled with it.
Subassembly (in a Folder)
Assemble step
If a step icon (assemble or disassemble) is blue, either the
component referenced by that step is suppressed or the step is
invalid (in which case, the step also has an invalid step icon).
This step will be ignored during playback.
Disassemble step
Assemble As Group
Disassemble As Group
Pause step
Motion step
Camera step
Current step (during playback)
Completed step (during playback)
Invalid step
A step is invalid if it cannot be assembled or disassembled at
that point in the sequence.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-9

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Pop-up Menus, Columns, and Details


When you right-click in the Sequence Navigator, a pop-up menu appears.
The options on this menu vary, depending on where the cursor is located.

The Details panel of the Sequence Navigator has several useful rows of
information. Each row is divided into a Property and a corresponding Value.
Most (but not all) of the values in Details are active toggles.
The list of Properties changes depending whether a Sequence or a Step is
selected.
When a Sequence
Property
Name

Value(s)
Sequence name

Comments
You can edit the default name.

Description

Sequence
description

Scope

Assembly
Restricted
Assemble
Disassemble
Operational

You can edit the default description


(which is the day and time of creation) to
a description that is more useful to you.
Sequence scope

Type

2-10

is selected:

Sequence type

Total
Duration

Total number of
frames in the
sequence

You cannot edit this number in the Details


panel.

Step
Increment

The sequence
step increment
number between
steps

By default, the increment number


is 10. (In other words, steps
are numbered 10, 20, 30, etc.)
You can edit this number.

Ignored
display

Visible
Hidden

Specifies whether to show components


that are in the Ignored folder.

Unprocessed
Display

Visible
Hidden

Specifies whether to show components


that are in the Unprocessed folder.

Display Split
Screen
Mating
Constraints

On
Off

Controls whether the sequence view


appears in a split screen.

On
Off

Specifies whether mating


constraints should be obeyed.
Mating constraints are on by default. You
can enable or disable them for a complete
sequence, but not for individual steps.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

When a Step is selected:


Property
Name

Value(s)

Comments

The name of
the selected
component or
subassembly

You can edit the name.


The new name will only be used in
the current sequence.

Type

Assemble
Disassemble
Camera
Motion
Pause

The type of step

Status

Valid
Invalid

Step
Number

Total number of
the step in the
sequence

You cannot edit this value in the Details


panel.

Cost

Optional value,
defaults to 0

You can enter a real number, greater than


or equal to zero, that represents the "cost"
of the step (whatever "cost" means to you).

Processing
Time

Optional value,
defaults to 0

You can enter a real number, greater


than or equal to zero, to represent the
processing time (whatever "processing
time" means to you).

Description

Optional value

You can enter a brief description of the


step (or the component/subassembly in
the step).
You cannot edit this number in the Details
panel.

Start Frame The frame


number when
the step starts
Total
Duration

Elements

The number of
frames used to
play the step

The number of
frames in each
movement

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

You can edit this number.


Caution: If you reduce motion duration
motion will be truncated.
Changing pause duration is a typical use
of editing duration.
The movements in a motion step.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-11

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Procedure: Creating a Sequence


Most sequences that you create will be disassembly sequences, because you
are starting with a completed assembly.

or choose AssembliesSequencing.

1. click Assembly Sequences

2. On the Standard toolbar, Click Create New Sequence

If you are assembling an assembly, an Unprocessed folder also


appears. In this case, the Unprocessed folder contains all the
components in the assembly instead of the Preassembled folder.
3. Move any components that you will not use in this sequence from the
Preassembled folder to the Ignored folder by right-clicking and choosing
Ignore or by dragging them.
4. Each sequence step can consist of a single component, a subgroup, a
camera step (view orientation), or a motion (and the movements that
make up that motion):

if you want to disassemble the selected


Click Disassemble
component as the first step.

Click Disassemble Togeather


subgroup as the first step.

if you want to disassemble a

Click Record Camera Position


showing a sequence step.

to modify the view before

Click Insert Motion


moving into position.

if you want to show the selected components

A sequence step can also be created by dragging the component or


subgroup to the top sequence node or to any position within existing
sequence steps.

2-12

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

5. Disassemble the remaining components or subgroups that you want to


disassemble into step nodes.

A single component is added as a disassemble step after the


highlighted step node (when you release the left mouse button).

A subgroup consisting of an existing subassembly is placed in a


sequence step named after the subassembly.

A subgroup consisting of a set of components is placed in a sequence


step named Sequence Group x, where x is an integer representing
its order of creation.

6. (Optional) You can set the Dynamic Clearance Checking toolbar options
to alert you or stop you if the components that you are moving collide
with other components.

Choose No Checking
checking.

Choose Highlight Collision


but not stop you.

Choose Stop Before Collision

if you do not want to use dynamic clearance

if you want the system to alert you,

if you want the system to stop you.

If a collision occurs, choose Acknowledge Collision

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

to continue.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-13

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

7. Choose Assemble

during any point of the sequence operation.

Choose Assemble Together

if you want to assemble a subgroup.

Be careful when assembling components that you already


disassembled. You can make a sequence step invalid if you delete
a necessary previous step. For example, if you disassemble and
reassemble a component and then delete the disassemble step, the
assemble step becomes invalid.
8. You can add information such as Description, Time, or Cost to a step or
sequence node in the Details panel below the Sequence Navigator.
9. You can remove components from the sequence by dragging them back
to the Unprocessed folder.
Dragging a component to the Unprocessed folder is equivalent to
deleting the step. Any information, such as a Description that you
added to the step, is lost.

10. Choose Show All Sequences


Sequence Navigator.

2-14

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

to display all sequences in the

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Procedure: Sequence Playback


During playback, components are added or removed from the sequencing
view in the graphics window if Display Split Screen is on in the Details panel.
The Sequence Navigator marks the current and completed steps with icons.
You can check the validity of the sequence by playing it back:
1. Choose Rewind to Start
first step.

if you want to play the sequence from the

if you want to play the assembly


Choose Fast Forward to End
sequence backwards from its last step.
You can also start the playback at a specific step in a sequence by
choosing the step that you want in the Sequence Navigator and
double-clicking the step (or you can choose Make Current Step from
the pop-up menu or toolbar).
Suppressed components are ignored during playback.
2. Set the Playback Speed for continuous playback.

or Play Backwards
3. Choose Play Forwards
the playback to the beginning.
Choose Stop

if you are running

to stop the continuous playback at any point.

or Next Frame
if you want to
4. Choose Previous Frame
manually move through each frame in the sequence.
A step usually consists of more than one frame, so you may have to
move through several frames before you see another component
assembled or disassembled.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-15

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Activity: Editing the Sequencing of the Vise Assembly


The assembly you will use already contains an assembly sequence.
You will complete the annotation of the assembly sequence and create
some additional steps.

Step 1:

Open apd_vise_seq and start the Assembly application.


This file will not be used later so a save will not be necessary,
But if you would like to save throughout the activity, please
do a Save As before going further. The file name will be
xxx_vise_seq.
If necessary choose StartAssemblies.

Step 2:

Examine the existing arrangements.


Pin the Assembly Navigator open

Right-click apd_vise_seqArranements to view the existing


arrangements.
Activate and view each arrangement. Select the Assemble
with Flat Plates arrangement when finished.
Fit the view.
Notice that in this arrangement the vise is disassembled.
When you create a sequence it is associated to the active
arrangement. It is often convenient to create an arrangement
to place components in the desired initial positions for the
sequence.

2-16

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Step 3:

Examine the existing sequence.


On the Assemblies toolbar, click Assembly Sequences
or choose AssembliesSequencing.

The components become invisible because the active (and


only) sequence begins with no components assembled.

Display the Sequence Navigator


Select the

Assemble with Flat Plates sequence node.

If necessary expand the Details section of the Sequence


Navigator.
Double-click the Display Split Screen property to toggle it on.
The model view appears on the left and the empty
sequencing view is moved to the right side of the split
screen.
Select any
any

Camera step, any

Assemble step, and then

Motion step.

Each time you select a different type of sequence step the


Details options will change.
Step 4:

Playback the sequence.


Select the
Assemble with Flat Plates sequence node and
toggle Display Split Screen to off.
Your screen should be blank.

Click Play Forwards

Play Forwards also appears on the Tools menu in the


sequencing task environment.

Click Rewind to Start

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-17

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Step 5:

Edit step names in the sequence.


Notice that a couple of steps do not have descriptive names.
These are default names assigned automatically as the
sequence was created.

You will examine these steps to learn what components are


involved and assign appropriate names.
In the Sequence Navigator, right-click
and choose Play To Step.

Sequence Group 3

The sequence plays through from the beginning and


stops just before Sequence Group 3 begins.
step symbols appear to indicate that earlier
The
steps are completed.
Since the Sequence Group 3 step has not actually begun,
there is no symbol indicating a current step.

2-18

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Click Next Frame

Two screws appear on the screen. They are the screws


that attach a jaw plate to the fixed jaw.
The Sequence Navigator updates to show that the
assembly step has completed with the one frame.
With Sequence Group 3 still selected, in the Details pane,
double-click the Value column for the Name.
Key in Fixed Jaw Plate Screws and press Enter.

Click Next Frame

Since the next frame is the first of several in the Motion


9 step, the navigator displays Motion 9 as the current
step.
Key in Fixed Jaw Plate Screws for the Name.
In the Description Value column, key in Attach flat jaw plate
to the fixed jaw.
Review the results of Attach flat jaw plate to the fixed jaw.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-19

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Step 6:

Edit a step duration.


During playback you may have decided that the pause
between attaching the fixed jaw plate screws and starting
the handle assembly was not very long. You decide to double
the pause count.

Right-click
Go To Step.

Pause at step number 120, and choose

The screw components on the graphic screen jump immediately


into position.
When you are not concerned about observing
intermediate motion Go To Step is much faster than
Play To Step.
In the Details pane for Pause step 120, in the Total Duration
Value column, key in 20.

2-20

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Step 7:

Copy and Paste steps.


You have made the determination that additional pauses
need to be inserted after the handle stop motion step 170 and
the screw nut motion step 260.
Right-click
Copy Step.

Pause at step number 120 and choose

Select Handle Stop step 170.


Right-click and choose Paste.
Notice that the Pause is pasted after the highlighted step,
and all subsequent steps are renumbered. In particular, the
screw nut motion step after which you wanted another pause
has now become step 270.
If you have made notes of places in a sequence where
additional steps are needed, it may be better to insert steps
working backwards from the end of the sequence. In this
way the numbering of earlier steps you had noted will not
be affected.
Select Screw Nut step 270, right-click it and choose Paste.
Select the group Assemble
Sequence Group 5 step 240,
right-click it and choose Go To Step.
Notice that the time it takes the system to calculate the
positions is longer than before, but Go To Step is still
much faster than Play To Step.

Click Next Frame

It is clear now that Sequence Group 5 is the moving jaw,


screw nut, jaw plate, and screws.
In the Details pane, in the Name Value field, key in Moving
Jaw Assm..

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-21

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Step 8:

Replay the sequence.


Click Rewind to Start

Click Play Forwards

During this play through watch for the appearance of


arrow symbols in the Sequence Navigator as the steps
play, and notice brief periods while the pauses you added
are the current step.

Click Play Backwards

Since a sequence can be played in either direction, from


any point and to any point, there is little to be gained
from creating multiple sequences that animate the same
parts through the same motions and in the same or
reverse order.

Click Finish Sequence


Step 9:

2-22

Close all parts.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Assembly Motion
You can create motion by creating a sequence and inserting motion steps.
Each motion step consists of one or more frames. A frame represents one unit
in time, and it is the smallest division of time in sequencing. When you are
creating (or playing back) a motion, one frame is generated (or played back)
for each movement you see in the graphics window.
You can check for collisions as components are moved. If you use dynamic
clearance checking, you can choose whether to stop the components before
they collide or to allow the movement to continue, but to highlight the
components that collided.
option from
Access the Insert Motion
the Assembly Sequencing and Motion toolbar.

See Also: DesignAssembliesSequences and Motion

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-23

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

The Record Component Motion Dialog Bar


When Inserting a Motion the Record Component Motion dialog bar appears.
Below are the actions available when creating a motion step:

Select Objects
Move objects
Move Handles Only
Vector options Inferred Vector is the default but all standard
vector options are available from the pull-down.
Snap Handles to WCS
Motion Record Preferences
Disassemble
Camera
OK
Cancel

2-24

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Motion Record Preferences

When you click Motion Record Preferences


from the Record
Component Motion dialog bar, a Preferences dialog appears:
Step Size Calculation you may let the system determine the step size
automatically, or you may specify a maximum step distance and maximum
step angle that limits the maximum motion in any one frame.
The Step Size slider (automatic mode only) lets you determine how finely
motion will be calculated. As the slider moves toward Fine more frames will
be generated.
The Max. Number of Frames limits the total duration of a step and thus
influences the amount of motion that the frame can display (in as specified
mode) or the distance per frame required to show the motion (in automatic
mode).

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-25

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Activity Creating a New Sequence


You need to create a short disassembly sequence showing how to release
a drawbar assembly from a vehicle.

Step 1:

Open apd_trailer_hitch_assm.
This file will not be used later so a save will not be necessary,
But if you would like to save throughout the activity, please
do a Save As before going further. The file name will be
xxx_trailer_hitch_assm.

2-26

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Step 2:

Initialize a sequence.
Click Assembly Sequences
AssembliesSequencing.

or choose

Pin open the Sequence Navigator

Move the cursor over the word Sequences in the navigator,


right-click and choose Create New Sequence.
Because no prior organization of arrangements was
created the default arrangement of Sequence_1 and
Arrangement 1 are used.
When there is no existing sequence in the assembly
Create New Sequence is available by right-clicking. At
any other time:

On the Standard toolbar, click Create New Sequence


.

Choose TaskNew from the menu bar.

Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+N.

Rename Sequence_1 to Release Hitch.


Use the Details section of the Sequence Navigator.

Release Hitch
Arrangement 1
Ignored
Preassembled

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-27

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Step 3:

Orient the assembly and record the camera position.


Orient the view to Trimetric and Fit your screen.

Click Record Camera Position

It is a good idea to assure that the view is oriented and


sized the way you want it as the first step in a sequence.

Click Finish Sequence

2-28

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Step 4:

Prepare to move components.


The sequence will first remove the clevis pin, followed by the
hitch pin, and finally slide out the drawbar.

You know that the clevis pin will collide with the hitch
pin because it must deform as it is withdrawn, so you
plan to move it with one rapid motion to avoid the area of
interference and then more slowly to simulate the rest of
the move.
You also want to check to see if the clevis pin is oriented
correctly to be withdrawn without other collisions.

Use the Assembly Navigator


apd_trailer_hitch_assm.

to Edit arrangements for

In the Assembly Navigator, select apd_trailier_hitch_assm.


Right-click apd_trailier_hitch_assm and choose
ArrangementsEdit.
In the Assembly Arrangements dialog box, select the default
arrangement and click Copy

Rename the new arrangement Release Hitch.


It is faster and more intuitive for future users of
your assembly to understand which sequences and
arrangements belong together if you give each pair the
same name.

Edit the Properties


of the Release Hitch arrangement by
selecting the Ignore All Mating Constraints check box.
On the Arrangement Properties dialog box, click OK.
On the Assembly Arrangements dialog box, click Close.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-29

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Step 5:

Check for possible interference.


Zoom in on the clevis pin.

It certainly looks as though the hitch pin has to be rotated


for the clevis pin to be properly removed. As it happens the
designer anticipated this and provided some reference curves
to make the proper positioning easier.
Make the apd_clevis_pin the Work Part.
The Work Part is automatically switched to its Entire
Part reference set.
There are two associative lines in the part that depict a
silhouette of the envelope the wire tips of the pin will
occupy if it is moved without deformation.

2-30

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Rotate the view until the clevis pin is nearly flat in the view,
press F8 to snap to the nearest orthographic orientation
without changing the zoom setting:

From this orientation you can see that the hitch pin
and clevis pin need to be rotated a small amount
counterclockwise before the clevis pin can be withdrawn.
Make apd_trailer_hitch_assm your Work Part.
Replace Reference Set for apd_clevis_pin with Entire Part.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-31

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Step 6:

Position the hitch and clevis pins.


Click Assembly Sequences

The view snaps to the initial camera position you


recorded.

Display the Sequence Navigator

Over the
Arrangement 1 node right-click and choose
Select Arrangement.
Select Release Hitch.
Click OK.
The sequence is now associated to an arrangement that will
ignore mating constraints.

Click Insert Pause

When you leave a sequence, it is necessary to play it


or make sure by other actions that the last step before
the point where you want to insert additional steps
is completed; for example make sure the Pause step
has a completed symbol
Navigator.

2-32

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

beside it in the Sequence

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Drag the

Pause step and drop it over the

Choose Play Forwards

Camera step.

Release Hitch
Release Hitch
Ignored
Preassembled
Camera
Pause
Orient to a Front view and zoom in.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-33

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Click Record Camera Position

Click Insert Motion

Expand the
Preassembled folder and select the
apd_hitch_pin.
Using the Sequence Navigator is a good way to select
components during sequence construction when screen
selection is awkward or impossible.
Hold the control key and also select apd_clevis_pin.

Choose Move Handles Only

Select the origin box of the csys handles.


Adjust the Selection Bar options if necessary, and select the
arc center of the hitch pin.

Choose Move Objects

Select the X to Y rotation handle.


Key in 1.0 for the Snap in the dynamic input box.

2-34

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Drag the rotation handle until the reference lines do not


intersect the receiver body, as shown below.

The Angle field updates as you drag, and then resets if


you stop. If you were to drag the rotation handle again,
or move any other handle before you complete the step,
the motion step would have more than one element.
If you continuously move the handle without releasing
the mouse button the motion will have only one element,
even if you drag it back and forth until it is correct.

Choose Cancel
Select

Motion 1 and examine the Details area.

If the motion was done in a single drag action the step will
have only one element:
Rename Motion 1 as Rotate Hitch Pin.
Add a brief Description such as: To permit clevis removal.
Step 7:

Remove the clevis pin.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-35

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Recall that you want to move the clevis pin in one additional
step comprised of two elements. The first element should
bring it clear of the region of interference with a quick
motion, and the next element will continue the motion more
slowly until the clevis pin is safely away from the hitch pin.

When you rotated the hitch pin mating constraints worked


to your advantage by forcing the clevis pin to move with it.
(You also could have selected both components.)
Now mating will work against you, preventing the desired
motion of any components.
Recall that arrangements will permit you to ignore mating
constraints and reposition components as necessary.
Zoom out slightly to create a space into which you can move
the clevis pin.

Choose Record Camera Position


Choose Insert Motion

Choose Motion Record Preferences

For Max. Number of Frames, key in 3.


This will assure that the first motion of the pin will use
no more than three frames.
Click OK.

2-36

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Select the apd_clevis_pin component from the graphic window.

Choose Move Objects

Select the X handle.


Key in 0.1 for the Snap.
Drag until the contour part of the clevis pin is just clear of the
hitch pin.

Using Motion Record Preferences set the Max. Number of


Frames back to 30.
Continue to drag the pin to the upper right corner of your view.
Choose Cancel.
It is not necessary to accept the movement before exiting
the option.
Examine the details for Motion 2.
Rename Motion 2 as Withdraw Clevis Pin.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-37

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Step 8:

Verify the motion of the clevis pin.


In the Sequence Navigator, on Camera Step 50 (before the last
motion), right-click and choose Go To Step.

Use Next Frame to step through the pin motion while watching
the Sequence Navigator.
If necessary, use the Details area to Delete unneeded
elements and to Edit Duration of the first element.

Click Play Forwards


to quickly finish the review when
the clevis pin begins to move beyond the intermediate position.
Right-click the movement elements to Rename them to
Intermediate Position and Complete Motion
Step 9:

Remove the hitch pin.


Orient the view to show the motion of the hitch pin.

Click Record Camera Position

Use Insert Motion

to withdraw the hitch pin.

Edit the name of the motion to reflect its purpose.


2-38

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Step 10: Slide the drawbar assembly away from the receiver.
Adjust the view and click Record Camera Position

Using the Sequence Navigator select apd_drawbar_assm.

Use Insert Motion


of the receiver.

Click Finish Sequence

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

to move the drawbar assembly clear

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-39

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Step 11: Prepare and then replay the sequence.


Replace the Reference Set of the clevis pin with its BODY
reference set.

2
Click Assembly Sequences

Use the Assembly Sequencing Playback options to Replay


the sequence and note needed corrections of camera positions
or pause steps.
Camera
Pause
Rotate Hitch Pin
Camera
Withdraw Clevis Pin
Camera
Remove Hitch Pin
Camera
Remove Drawbar
Insert disassembly steps to remove the elements that were
moved after their respective motion steps.
Replay after editing until you are satisfied with your results.
Step 12: Close all parts.

2-40

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Sequencing and Motion

Summary
In this lesson you:

Used Copy and Paste to add elements to the vise assembly sequence.

Edited the duration of pauses and step names in the Details area of the
Sequence Navigator.

Created Camera Positions and Motion Steps in the trailer hitch assembly.

Created and edited multiple element motion steps.

Inserted disassembly steps in your trailer hitch assembly.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

2-41

Lesson

Documenting Design Intent


3

Purpose
Since the design intent determines the modeling strategy used to create a
part, documentation should be added to the part to convey the design intent
to downstream users. In this lesson, you will identify ways to document the
design intent.
Objective
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

Identify methods to document the design intent of a part.

Apply Feature Sets in a part model.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

3-1

Documenting Design Intent

Defining Design Intent


An important first step in building a parametric model is establishing the
design intent of the part. This will determine the modeling strategy to use
and should be a standard practice for every part.
In establishing the design intent of a part, you must determine two important
items to optimally build the part model:

Design Considerations:
What are the functional requirements of the part?
What are the relationships between features on the part?

Potential Areas for Change:


What portions of the model are subject to change?
What is the scope of the changes? (drastic topology changes?)
Will the model be copied and modified for other projects?

Design intent can be based on a number of factors:

Known information

Form, fit, and function requirements

Manufacturing requirements

External equations

The design intent will determine the modeling strategy and the techniques
used to create a part. The following tasks are influenced by the design intent
that is established.

Selecting feature types (features, feature operations, sketches)

Establishing feature relationships (size, attachment, position, order)

Defining sketch constraints

Creating expressions (equations, conditions)

Establishing part relationships (interpart expressions, linked geometry)

It is possible to add design intent to a model after the initial construction.


However, the amount of rework will depend on the modeling techniques
originally used.

3-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Documenting Design Intent

Documentation Methods
One of the primary purposes for creating an associative parametric model is
to capture design intent and reduce the amount of time required for editing.
Edits may sometimes be performed long after the model is created and
possibly by a different person. If the design intent is well documented, it will
be easier to identify what to change and the impact of the change.
The topics discussed in this Lesson are all methods used to document the
design intent of a model and can be applied in varying degrees.
These methods are most effective when implemented as company standards
so users can easily share data with one another.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

3-3

Documenting Design Intent

Layers and Categories


Create objects on different layers based on their type and purpose and assign
descriptive category names.

Layer/Status

Count

Categories this Layer is


Included in
ALL,MODEL, SOLID

1 Work

21 Invisible

15

SKETCHES,
TOP_PROFILE

61 Selectable

MODEL, DATUMS,
ABS

62 Selectable

DATUMS,
REFERENCE

63 Visible Only

DATUMS, TRIM

There are three methods available for moving objects to other layers:

Choose FormatMove to Layer.

On the Utility toolbar click Move to Layer icon

In the Edit Object Display


dialog box, you can specify a layer. The
selected object(s) will move to that layer.
Category names are limited to 30 characters. Detailed descriptions
containing up to 80 characters can also be applied to categories.
See Also: Discovering NXGetting StartedWorking with
PartsManaging a PartFormatFormat MenuAbout Layers

3-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Documenting Design Intent

Feature Names
Adding a user-defined feature name to the system feature name is another
way to identify features and maintain Design Intent.
There are three methods you can use in the Part Navigator:

Right-click on the feature and choose Rename.

Right-click on the feature and choose Properties.

Select the feature node once to highlight it and then select the feature
name and enter the new name in the text field.

Features can also be identified by their corresponding image next to the


check mark in the Part Navigator.
Model History
Datum Coordinate System (0)
Sketch (1) SKETCH_000
Extrude (2)
Edge Blend (3)
Edge Blend (4)
Sketch names can be added during the Sketch initial creation.

Click Sketch

Enter the name in the Sketch Name text field next to the Finish Sketch
button.

See Also: DesignModelingModeling ToolsPart NavigatorPart


Navigator Shortcut Options

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

3-5

Documenting Design Intent

Expression Names and Comments


Important expressions can be named during creation or in the Expressions
dialog to make them easier to identify and reference. Comments can be added
to expressions after their initial creation for a more detailed description.
(preceded by two forward slashes "//").
Choose ToolsExpression to access the Expressions dialog.
Tips for Naming Expressions

During model creation it may be easier to use a short name for an


expression if it is referenced often (i.e. "d" for a part diameter). It can be
renamed to a longer, more descriptive name after the model is complete
("diameter" or "dia").

Use filters to exclude the automatically generated expressions (beginning


with "p") and list only those that were renamed.

Add different prefixes to identify the types of expressions (interpart,


suppress features, mating condition offsets, etc.).
See Also: DesignModelingModeling ToolsExpressions

3-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Documenting Design Intent

Spreadsheets
A spreadsheet can be stored with an NX part and used to document model.
Expressions and attributes can be imported into the spreadsheet and edited.
Equations and textual information can be created in a spreadsheet and
formatted for easy reference.
Choose ToolsSpreadsheets to open a spreadsheet in NX.
1
2
3
4

A
B
Pump Design Spreadsheet
Key Parameters
Values
rpc_pistion_dia
3.25
rpc_throw
2.324755

rpc_pulley_dia

6.930801

6
7
8
9
10

motor_dia
motor_rpm
shaft_rpm

2.25
1725
560.0002

11

Performance
Rating

150.0001

Spreadsheet capabilities will be discussed in more detail later in the


course.
See Also: DesignModelingModeling
ToolsExpressionsExpression Options

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

3-7

Documenting Design Intent

Object Names
Names can be assigned to critical objects so that they can be visually
identified. Named objects can also be referenced in the class selection dialog.
Choose EditProperties to assign a name to an object.
If the object is a separate feature, for example a Sketch, the feature
name will also be available for editing.

Choose PreferencesVisualizationNames/Borders and adjust the Object


Name Display setting to view the name in the graphics window. Feature
Names do not appear in the graphics window.
The name assigned to an object will be copied to any objects that are
linked from it using the WAVE Geometry Linker.
Drafting Annotation
A dedicated layer and view can be established to document the design intent
with drafting annotation, in the Drafting or PMI applications. The notes may
describe the modeling strategy, list key parameters, and document the part
behavior during updates (such as a problem with a specific blend). Associative
expression and attribute values can be imbedded in the notes.
In Drafting, click Text

See Also: GatewayGatewayGateway Menu & Dialog


ReferencePreferences
In PMI, click one of several Note buttons.

3-8

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Documenting Design Intent

Visual Editor
A complex part may have hundreds of features and thousands of expressions.
The key parameters of the part may be scattered among different sketches
and features. The Visual Editor provides a static graphical representation of
a model with only its key parameters in one place. The parameters can be
modified and the part updated from this dialog.
Choose ToolsVisual Editor to access the Visual Parameter Editor dialog.

3
You must be in either the Essentials or Advanced with Full
Menus role to access Visual Editor.
See Also: DesignModelingModeling ToolsVisual Editor

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

3-9

Documenting Design Intent

Feature Sets
A Feature Set is a named collection of features that have the same behavior
during certain feature-related functions such as Suppress, Delete, Move,
Instance, and Copy. The logical grouping of features can be used to help
convey design intent as well as simplify the editing of a model.
Choose FormatGroup Features to access the Sets of Features dialog. They
can also be created by selecting the desired features in the Part Navigator
and then using MB3Group.

3-10

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Documenting Design Intent

Feature Set Name - This is a required field that lets you assign a name to the
Feature Set. The name you assign will appear in the Part Navigator and
in dialogs containing feature lists.
Filter - Lets you limit the number of entries displayed in the Features in
Part listing, which is useful in parts with many features. This field is case
sensitive.
Add Dependencies - Specifies that those features dependent on the features
you add also be included in the set. For example, if Add Dependencies is on
and you add a sketch to the set, any extruded features produced from the
sketch will also be added. This option must be set before a feature is selected.
All in Body - Specifies that all features in the body be included in the set. For
example, if a boss feature is added while All in Body is on, all other features
that make up the same solid body will also be added. This excludes datums,
sketches, and free form features used for trimming.
Features in Part - Displays the names of features in the part in a scrollable
listing, letting you select those to be added to the Feature Set. Features can
be added to the set by highlighting them in the list and choosing the Add
button, double-clicking on the feature in the list, or by selecting them in the
graphics window. Multiple selection is allowed.
Features in Set - Lists the names of all features that you have selected to
add to the feature set.
Hide Feature Set Members - Lets you prevent the set members from being
displayed in any feature dialog or Part Navigator. If this check box is cleared,
and the Feature Set is then Suppressed, the individual features that make it
up will not be suppressedonly the individual features can be Suppressed
and Unsuppressed.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

3-11

Documenting Design Intent

Procedure
1. Choose FormatGroup Features.
2. Enter the Feature Set Name.
3. Select or clear the Add Dependencies, and All in Body check boxes as
desired.
4. Select features (using the Filter as needed) in the Features in Part list and
click Add . You can also select the features from the graphics window.

5. Select or clear the Hide Feature Set Members check box as desired.
6. Choose OK.
If you use the Part Navigator, the features are selected first. The rest
is as shown above.
Usage Considerations

3-12

A feature set can be edited by choosing EditFeatureParameters (or


using the Part Navigator). The Sets of Features dialog appears and
allows you to Add features, Remove features, or change the Hide Feature
Set Members check box status.

A feature set can be reordered but it is restricted by the dependencies of


its member features.

A feature can be a member of more than one set. However, a feature


cannot be added to or removed from a feature set when it is a hidden
member of another feature set. To add or remove a feature, first edit the
other feature set and then toggle Hide Feature Set Members off.

To delete only the feature set without deleting its members, first edit
the feature set and remove all of its members. Then delete it using the
Part Navigator. Deleting a Feature Set also Implies deleting all of its
members as well.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Documenting Design Intent

You can determine if a particular feature is a member of a feature set


by choosing InformationFeature (or List Information from the Part
Navigator pop-up menu). Below is a sample that could appear at the end
of the information listing of a blend feature:
## Member of the following groups:
all_blends(21)
lug(20)

3
A seed part may contain empty feature sets with standard names.
Features can be added to the sets after the model is created.
See Also: DesignModelingModeling ToolsGroup Features

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

3-13

Documenting Design Intent

Activity: Creating Feature Sets


In this activity, you will collect a group of features in a Feature Set and use it
to create an instance array.
Step 1:

Open apd_feature_set_1 and enter the Modeling application if


it is not already active.

Step 2:

Create a feature set containing only the blends.

Choose FormatGroup Features.


Enter all_edge_blends for the Feature Set Name.
Change the Filter to E*.
This is case sensitive make sure to use a capital E.
Select the three Edge Blend features from the Features in Part
list and click Add
Click and Drag to highlight all three and click the Add
button or "Double-click" each one individually.
Make sure the Hide Feature Set Members check box is selected.
Click OK.

3-14

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Documenting Design Intent

Step 3:

Use the Part Navigator to Suppress and Unsuppress the Feature


Set all_edge_blends.

In the Part navigator, double-click the all_edge_blend Feature


Set, clear the Hide Feature Set Members check box, and click
OK.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

3-15

Documenting Design Intent

Step 4:

Use the Part Navigator to create a Feature Set for the Lug.

3
Highlight the features listed below in the Part Navigator then
choose MB3Group.
Extruded (15)

Simple Hole (16)

Blend (17)

Enter lug for the Feature Set Name.


Change the Filter back to *.
Make sure Hide Feature Set Members check box is selected.
Choose OK.
Examine the Part Navigator and note the features from the
lug Feature Set are no longer visible, where the features
from the all_blends feature set are.

3-16

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Documenting Design Intent

Step 5:

Create a circular array of the lug feature set, using the existing
datum axis as the rotation vector.
On the Feature Operation toolbar, click Instance Feature
or choose InsertAssociative CopyInstance.
Choose Circular Array.
Choose the lug Feature Set.

Key in 4 for the Number.


Key in 90 for the Angle.
Click OK.
Choose Datum Axis for the Instance rotation axis.
Select the existing Datum Axis.
Choose Cancel.

To apply another feature to all instances of the lug (such


as a blend), you must reorder the new feature before the
lug feature set or use Make Current Feature to create the
feature before the lug feature set and then add it to the lug
feature set.
Step 6:

Close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

3-17

Documenting Design Intent

Summary
This lesson explored methods to document a part to convey design intent
to future users of the part.
In this lesson you:

3-18

Identified methods to document the design intent within a part.

Created a collection of features in a Feature Set to document the part and


to use in an instance array.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Lesson

Part Interrogation
Purpose
A fully developed parametric model can contain a complex system of
relationships between many different types of objects. In this lesson, you will
explore tools to determine these dependencies and ensure successful updates.

Objective
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

Identify relationships between features, expressions, and objects.

Use the Part Navigator to determine feature dependencies.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

4-1

Part Interrogation

Feature and Object Associativity


Identifying features and object relationships is important in predicting and
explaining the behavior of a model during updates. The following tools are
available to help you identify feature and object dependencies.

4-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Part Interrogation

Object Dependency Graph


An Object Dependency Graph illustrates the features that define a selected
object and is displayed at the bottom of the Information window.
or choose InformationObject . You can also
Click Object Information
access this by right-clicking on a feature in the Part Navigator and from
the Feature Browser.
In the example below an edge was selected. The Object Dependency Graph
shows that it was formed by the intersection of two faces from the same
Extruded Body.

The Used by section below the graph indicates the edge is not used by any
other feature or object.

The ID numbers are internal tags automatically assigned to objects


when they are created. If a name is assigned to an object , it is displayed
instead of the ID number.
See Also: Getting StartedIntroduction to NXUsing NXBasic
OperationsOther OperationsDisplaying Information

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

4-3

Part Interrogation

Feature Browser
The InformationFeature option opens the Feature Browser dialog, which
allows you to display relevant information about features created while
generating a 3-D model. You can see all features in your model, including
their dimensions and dependencies.
The Feature Browser dialog is divided into two list boxes. The top list
box shows all of the features in the model. The bottom list box shows
dependencies for features selected in the top list box.
Features are listed in the order in which they were created, as indicated by
the time stampthe number in parentheses at the end of the name. The
time stamp also indicates the order in which features will be evaluated when
the model is updated.

Choose InformationFeature to access the Feature Browser.


See Also: Getting StartedWorking with PartsCommon
ToolsCommon ToolsInformationDisplaying InformationDisplay
Feature Information
Feature Dependencies
When a feature is selected from the upper list box or graphics window, the
bottom list box shows either its Children or Parent features depending on the
setting of the radio button. When a dependent feature is selected from the
lower list box, the system will highlight it in the graphics window.
The parent and children features may be displayed in an Information window
by changing the List option to Dependencies or All and choosing Apply.
Object Dependency Browser
The Object Dependency Browser lets you obtain information about the
specific objects related to the selected feature. You can choose to list either
the child or parent objects of the feature and filter the listing by object type.
When an object is selected from the list, Display Information allows you to
display the object information (including the Object Dependency Graph).
The Object Dependency Browser can also be accessed from the
Part Navigator by right-clicking on a feature and choosing Object
Dependency Browser.

4-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Part Interrogation

Part Navigator
The Part Navigator provides a visual representation of the parent-child
relationships and the status of features in the work part.
On the Resource Bar, click Part Navigator

See Also: DesignModelingModeling ToolsPart Navigator


Feature Dependencies

Feature information may be obtained and displayed in an Information


window by right-clicking on a feature in the Part Navigator and choosing
Information. This will produce the same information obtained by choosing
InformationFeature.
When a Feature is selected in the Part Navigator, the Parent Features
are highlighted in Pink and the Child Features are highlighted in Blue.
Feature dependencies can be identified visually in the Part Navigator by
choosing the Dependencies button at the bottom of the Part Navigator.
The Main Panel Timestamp Order mode lists every feature in the work part
in the historical order of its creation timestamp. To show the features in
reverse-timestamp order, click on the Name title bar.
ToolsPart NavigatorTimestamp Order or right-click in the
Choose
Part Navigator background and choose Timestamp Order
Model History
Datum Coordinate System (0)
Sketch (1) SKETCH_000
Extrude (2)
Edge Blend (3)
Edge Blend (4)

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

4-5

Part Interrogation

Feature Status
The Part Navigator comes with a standard set of columns. You can enable or
disable the display of column names, except Feature Name, which is always
visible, reorder them, and add your own.
To add or remove columns in the Part Navigator use MB3 in the Part
Navigator background and choose Columns(select the desired column
name). The Status column lets you see the status of features without doing
an inquiry on the part or feature.
Listed below are the available Status options:

4-6

No Status is the normal state for a feature node that is Current and up
to date.

Suppressed appears if you suppress a feature by clearing its check box,


or by using the Suppress Feature edit option.

Suppressed by expression appears if you suppress a feature by using


the Suppress by Expression edit option. An equal sign appears over the
features check box.

Modified appears if a feature has been modified with Delayed Update on


Edit enabled. An exclamation icon appears over the features check box.

Update failedif a feature fails to update, and you accept the failure from
the Edit During Update facility, the status becomes "updated failed." A
red and white cross icon appears over the feature check box.

Parent failed update if a features parent fails to update, and you accept
the failure from the Edit During Update facility, the status becomes
"parent failed updated." A red and white cross icon appears over the
feature check box.

Inactive appears for nodes listed after a feature specified as the current
feature and turns the check box into a diamond outline. The current
feature is designated using the Make Current Feature option in the Part
Navigator pop-up menu.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Part Interrogation

Managing the Display of the Part Navigator


As models become more complex and the number of features increases, it
becomes more difficult to find specific feature nodes in the Part Navigator.
The following options are helpful in managing the display of the Part
Navigator so that it can be used more efficiently.
To access these options in the Part Navigator rightclick in the background
and make your selection. Some of options below are also available in the
ToolsPart Navigator menu.
See Also: DesignModelingModeling ToolsPart Navigator
Finding Features
Two options are available to help you find a feature in the Part Navigator.

Show Current Feature will highlight the last active feature in the
part (the active feature with the highest timestamp).

Find Object will allow you to enter a search string and then
highlight the first feature name in the list containing the string. Choosing
Apply will continue the search and highlight the next feature containing
the string.

Filter Settings
The features listed in the Part Navigator can be reduced to a manageable
number using Filter Settings. Features may be included or excluded from the
list by: information category, name, attribute, selected major object, feature
category, feature type, state, timestamp and model views.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

4-7

Part Interrogation

Procedure: Creating a Filter


or right-click in the
1. Choose ToolsPart NavigatorFilter Settings
Part Navigator background and choose Filter Settings.
2. In the Add Filter By list, choose dialog, choose the option to specify the
category of objects (e.g., Feature Type, Name, or Attribute) that you want
to use in the filter definition.
3. Specify the objects with the options that appear in the changeable window
below the Add Filter By option. The options vary, depending on the
selected Add Filter By option.

or Exclude
to specify whether the objects
4. Press Include
should be included in or excluded from the Part Navigator.
The definition appears in the list box. If the Part Navigator is open, the
Apply Filter button is automatically invoked and the navigator updates
according to the specified filter. This allows you to immediately see the
effects of the filter.
5. Specify additional definitions that you want to include in the filter.
The definitions are applied from top to bottom, which means that
definitions lower in the list may overrule definitions higher in the
list. For example, if a definition says that features with timestamps
greater than 30 should be excluded, and the definition below it says
that blends should be included, then a blend with a timestamp of
31 would appear in the Part Navigator (but a datum plane with
a timestamp of 32 would not).
6. When you have finished defining the filter, you can optionally press the
Save button to save it. This creates a copy of the filter for later use.
Any modifications you make to the Current filter will not affect any
saved filters. Activating any saved filter, populates the Current
filter list box with the saved filters definitions. Filters are only
saved for the duration of the session. They are not saved with the
part , but can be used with multiple parts. Restarting NX clears
out the saved filters.
The Filters dialog switches to the Saved page, which shows all the
filters that you created for the part.
The new filter appears in the list with a default name.
You can optionally rename the saved filter.

4-8

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Part Interrogation

Applying a Filter
You can apply the filter by:

Choosing ToolsPart NavigatorApply Filter.

Right-clicking in the Part Navigator any of the column title bars or


background area and choosing Apply Filter.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

4-9

Part Interrogation

Expression Relationships
There are many tools available to obtain information about expressions
used in a part or assembly. A few of the more useful methods to examine
expression relationships in a parametric model are described in this section.
See Also: DesignModelingModeling ToolsExpressions
List References
You can locate referenced expressions within the Expressions dialog box.
Rightclick an expression and choose List References for the selected
expression and all the expressions in loaded parts that reference that
expression will display in an information window, this includes interpart
expression. This option is useful if you need to change an expression and you
want to know if it will affect any other expressions.

Choose ToolsExpression to access the Expressions dialog box.


List by Feature
Choose InformationFeature to access the Feature Browser dialog box,
select the desired feature and from the List, choose Expressions. The Part
Navigator pop-up menu can be used to list the expressions for a specific
feature along with a description of the parameters they define.
List All by Reference
Choose InformationExpressionList All by Reference to list all of the
expressions in the work part that are referenced by features. The expressions
are listed by feature in an Information window.

4-10

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Part Interrogation

Activity: Model Interrogation


In this activity, you will investigate feature and expression relationships in
an existing part.
Step 1:

Open apd_dependent_1 and start the Modeling application, if


it is not already active.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

4-11

Part Interrogation

Step 2:

Modify the Part Navigator display.


If it is not already done, pin open the Part Navigator

If it is not already displayed in Timestamp Order, turn it on


and locate the feature set ABS_Datums.

Choose ToolsPart NavigatorFilter Settings

Set the Add Filter By list to Name.


In the changeable window, key in ABS*.

4
Choose Exclude

Feature Set (6) has been filtered out of the Part Navigator
display.
Set the Add Filter By to Feature Type.
Choose Datum Plane from the list.
Exclude the following Feature Types from the Part Navigator.

Sketch

Subtract

Unite

Current
Everything
All of type Datum Plane
All of type Sketch
All of type Subtract
All of type Unite
Name is ABS*
Choose Close.

4-12

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Part Interrogation

Step 3:

Playback the model.


Choose FormatLayer Settings

Select the Show Object Count and Show Category Names


check boxes, and note the layers that have objects and category
names.
Make the layers containing the sketches and sheets
Selectable.
Click OK.
Fit your view and set the Rendering Style to Static Wireframe.

Choose EditFeaturePlayback

Note the changes to the Model in the graphics window.

Continually Step
was created.
Step 4:

through the model to review how it

Turn off the Part Navigator Filter.


Choose ToolsPart NavigatorApply Filter to check the
current filter off.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

4-13

Part Interrogation

Step 5:

Determine the impact of a change to an expression.


Choose InformationExpressionList All by Reference.
From the Information window menu bar, choose EditFind
and search for Wall_thk.
If you keep choosing Find Next you will find that the expression
is referenced by offset curves, blends, offset sheets, extruded
features, and a sketch.
Close the Information window.
Choose ToolsExpression.

Right-click on the wall_thk expression and choose List


References.
Note that Wall_thk is referenced by several other
expressions.
Close the Information window.
Change the value of the expression Wall_thk to .25.
Choose Apply.

Choose Cancel.

4-14

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Part Interrogation

Step 6:

Identify object dependencies.


Make ALL layersSelectable and Fit the view.
Note the vertical line in the middle of the display that does not
appear to serve any purpose, but it cannot be deleted. If you
try using EditDelete the system will ignore the command.

Choose InformationObject, select the line and then click OK


(on the Class Selection dialog box).
Note the Object Dependency Graph at the end of the
listing. Although it does not have a parent object, the line
(ID 2118) is used by the feature named MOLDLINE (11) .
In the Part Navigator, rightclick RULED (11) "MOLDLINE"
feature and choose Object Dependency Browse.
Select Parent(s).
Note that the line appears in the list (LINE - ID 2118). If
you select it from the list it will highlight in the graphics
area.
Cancel the Object Dependency Browser dialog box.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

4-15

Part Interrogation

In the Part Navigator, rightclick RULED (11) "MOLDLINE"


and choose Edit Parameters.
Choose Display Parameters.
The vertical line is a spine string. Spine strings are used
in free form features to control the orientation of the
rulings on a surface.
You can not delete the Spine String until you edit the
Ruled Feature, possibly replacing the existing string with
a different Spine String.
Step 7:

Close all parts.

4-16

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Part Interrogation

Summary
In this lesson you:

Applied tools to determine the dependencies between features,


expressions, and objects in a part.

Modified the display of the Part Navigator to show detailed feature


dependencies.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

4-17

Lesson

Editing Parametric Models


Purpose
Everything in a parametric model is subject to change. A model may undergo
engineering changes that affect the design intent or changes that are
propagated from a spreadsheet in the top level assembly. In this lesson, you
will apply methods and techniques that allow editing flexibility and minimize
rework when these changes occur.
Objective
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

Reorder features.

Insert features.

Suppress features with expressions.

Determine how to retain child features when a parent is deleted.

Identify techniques to prepare a model for major changes.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-1

Editing Parametric Models

Reordering Features
When a feature is created, the system assigns it a time stamp. When you
modify a body, the update is controlled by the ordering of the time stamps.
Reorder Feature lets you edit a model by changing the order in which a
feature is applied to a body. Features can be reordered before or after a
selected reference feature. When you do this, you are changing the order in
which the features are regenerated after the part model is edited.
Consider a model consisting of a block, hollow, and pad created in different
timestamp order:

Feature order

Feature order

Extrusion

Extrusion

Shell

Pad

Pad

Shell

In the first illustration, since the pad was created last, it was
not included in the shell operation. To include both the extrusion
and the pad in the shell operation, you would need to reorder the
pad to come before the shell (or the shell to come after the pad).
See Also: DesignModelingEditing ObjectsFeatureReorder
Feature

5-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Reordering Features with the Part Navigator


The most intuitive way to reorder features is using "drag and drop" in the
Part Navigator. The right-click pop-up menu also allows you to reorder
features before or after a reference feature.
If you drag a feature up the tree, it will be inserted before the feature that is
highlighted when you drop it. If you drag a feature down the tree, it will be
inserted after the feature that is highlighted when you drop it.
You may want to change your Part Navigator to Timestamp Order
before performing a Reorder.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-3

Editing Parametric Models

Procedure: Reordering Features with the Part Navigator


1. Change your Part Navigator to Timestamp Order.
2. Select the feature to be reordered.
3. Drag the feature up or down the Part Navigator.
4. Drop the feature in the new location.
You can also use the Reorder Before and Reorder After options on the
right-click pop-up menu.

5-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

The Reorder Feature Dialog Box


In a complex model with many features, it may be impractical to use the Part
Navigator to reorder features. To access the Reorder Feature dialog.
On the Edit Feature toolbar, click Reorder Feature
EditFeatureReorder.

or choose

The Reference Feature list box lists the features in the part in their
timestamp order. You can select a feature from this list to be the Reference
feature on which to base the reordering of items you select from the
Reposition Features list box.
Choose Method lets you choose where to place the Reposition feature in
relation to the Reference feature.
The Reposition Features list lets you select the features you wish to move in
relation to the Reference feature. The features that appear in the Reposition
Features list box will have timestamps that follow or precede that of the
Reference feature, depending on the setting of the Choose Method option.
Choosing the Apply button will only change the order in which the
features appear in the list in the dialog. The model will not update until
you choose OK. This allows you to define multiple reorder operations
before waiting for the update of a complex model.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-5

Editing Parametric Models

Procedure: Reorder Feature


The general procedure for reordering features using the Reorder Feature
dialog is as follows:
1. Click Reorder Feature

or choose EditFeatureReorder.

2. Select the Reference Feature.


3. Indicate a method, Before or After.
4. Select the feature(s) you wish to reorder.
5. Choose OK.
The system will not allow you to reorder a child feature before its
parent.

5-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Activity: Reordering Features


In this activity, you will reorder features in an existing model to solve an
editing problem.
Step 1:

Open apd_reorder_1 and start the Modeling application, if it is


not already active.

Step 2:

Pin the Part Navigator open, change the display to Timestamp


order and examine the features.

Select each feature in the Part Navigator and reference the


feature in the graphics window.
Model History
Datum Coordinate System (0)
Sketch (1) FRONT_OUTLINE
Extrude (2)
Sketch (3) RECT_GROOVE
Extrude (4)
Counterbored Hole (5)
Counterbored Hole (6)
Rectangular Pad (7)
Edge Blend (8)
Edge Blend (10)

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-7

Editing Parametric Models

Step 3:

Edit the Rectangular Pad feature.


Choose ToolsExpression.
Change the expression pad_width from 89.0 to 127.0.
The pad width changes but notice the Counterbore holes
do not pierce through the top of the part. You may need
to shape your part for a proper view.

5
Step 4:

Interrogate the Counterbore Hole features before determining the


next step.
Select one of the Counterbore Hole features in the Part
Navigator.
Open the Dependencies window at the bottom of the Part
Navigator.
Expand the Parents node and select Extrude (2).
The Extrude feature highlights because the top face of it
was used as the placement face. When the Pad Width
was revised the placement face for the Counterbore Holes
was overridden.
If the design intent requires that the holes stay in the
same position, the solution is to reattach the Counterbore
Holes to the top face of the pad and then add the height
of the pad to the Counterbore depth.

5-8

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Step 5:

Reattach the Counterbore Holes to the Rectangular Pad.


Right-click one of the Counterbored holes and choose
EditParameters.
Choose Reattach.
Select the top face of the Rectangular Pad (5).
Review the error message and exit the operation.
Verify the timestamp of the Rectangular Pad feature in the
Part Navigator.
Model History
Datum Coordinate System (0)
Sketch (1) FRONT_OUTLINE
Extrude (2)

Sketch (3) RECT_GROOVE


Extrude (4)
Counterbored Hole (5)
Counterbored Hole (5)
Rectangular Pad (7)
Edge Blend (8)
Edge Blend (10)
Because the Rectangular Pad feature has a later
timestamp you will not be able to Reattach the
Counterbore Holes.
Cancel the Reattach dialog box.
Step 6:

Reorder the Rectangular Pad using drag and drop.


Select the Rectangular Pad feature in the Part Navigator and
drag it above the first Counterbore Hole feature in the list.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-9

Editing Parametric Models

Step 7:

Reattach the counterbore holes.


Double-click on one of the Counterbore Hole features in the
Part Navigator.
Choose Reattach.
Select the top face of the Rectangular Pad and click OK until
the model updates.
Repeat the process for the remaining Counterbore Hole.

Step 8:

Edit the Counterbore depth to relate it to the expression for the


Pad height.
Edit the C-BORE Depth from 8.0 to pad_hgt+8.0.

Step 9:

Edit the width of the pad.


Change the expression pad_width from 127.0 to 114.0.
Now, there is a problem with Blend (7), which is still
applied after the holes. The current position of the holes
produces two new edges that are not associated with the
blend.

5-10

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Step 10: Reorder the Counterbore Holes after Edge Blend (9).

Step 11: Close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-11

Editing Parametric Models

Inserting Features in the Feature List


The Make Current Feature option in the Part Navigator pop-up menu allows
you to quickly create new features in the middle of a feature tree without
reordering any features. All features after the current feature become
inactive, and all new features that are created will be added after the current
feature.
See Also: DesignModelingModeling ToolsPart NavigatorPart
Navigator shortcut menus
Usage Considerations

5-12

When you have finished inserting features, select the last feature in the
Part Navigator, and choose Make Current Feature.

When you insert a feature ahead of inactive features, the inactive features
are not used in most internal checks. If you make changes that invalidate
the model, you will still receive an error when you restore the inactive
features.

A noteworthy check that is performed is the parent relationship on


extruded or revolved strings of curves. Even if the extruded or revolved
body is inactive, you are still required to edit the defining string before
deleting curves and adding new ones.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Replacing Features
You can make changes to the basic geometry of a design without having to
remodel all dependent features from scratch, by using the Replace Features
option. You can replace features that create a single body together with
other features applied to it, datum features, and curve features, and reapply
dependent features from the first body onto the second. The original features
on the first body and datums are thus replaced by new features, while
maintaining associativity with downstream features.
On the Edit Feature tooblar, click Replace Feature
EditFeatureReplace.

or choose

See Also: DesignModelingEditing ObjectsFeatureReplace


This is a very powerful and flexible tool that you can use in many ways. For
example, you can use it to:

Replace older versions of bodies imported from external systems with


updated versions of the same bodies, without redoing later modeling.

Replace one free form surface with another.

Remodel a set of features in a body in a different way.

Re-specify the selection intent of the downstream features.

Reorient the input direction of a replace feature, so that it can be used by


the downstream features.

Replace Features is not meant as a replacement for the Copy Feature, Paste
Feature, or any of the other Edit Feature options. It is intended as a way to
make edits to a body based on its parent geometry. As such, it maintains
associativity between features and bodies.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-13

Editing Parametric Models

Replace Features dialog box

Original Features lets you select the original features that you
want to replace. The original features can be a set of features on the same
body, datum plane features, datum axis features and curve features.
Selected features move from the Eligible Features to Replace list to the
Features to Replace section.

Replacement Features lets you select the features you want to use
as replacements for those you selected in the Original Features selection
step. Replacement Features can be a set of features on another body,
datum plane features, datum axis features and curve features in the same
part file. You can use the same methods to select the features as shown
above for the Original Features selection step
Selected features move from the Eligible Features to Replace list to the
Replacement Features section.

Parent Map lets you select new parents for the children of the
features you are replacing. You can re-specify the Selection Intents of the
down stream feature it displays. For those features that do not support
Selection Intent, this will show their parents as before.
Original features and replacement features must be active features.
Inactive features cannot be selected as original or replacement
features.
If you invoke Replace Feature from the Part Navigator Pop-Up
menu the dialog opens in the Original Features selection step, with
the source body defaulted to the body of the selected feature. The
Body/Datum selection step is unavailable in this case.

5-14

The Dependent Feature list box will display a list of dependant features
that will be affected by the replace operation. When you select the
features to replace in the Original Feature selection step, the dependent
features of the selected features are displayed here.

The Use Copy of Replacement Features check box lets you copy the
Replacement Features and use them for the replacement operation. The
Replacement Features are left in place and are not deleted. If you do not
select this check box, the Replacement Features are deleted.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

The Retain Original Features check box lets you save the original features
instead of deleting them. Clear this check box, so that the software deletes
the features that are being replaced

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-15

Editing Parametric Models

Activity: Inserting and Replacing Features


In this activity, you will reparent an existing sheet body with a newly
imported surface.
Step 1:

Open apd_replace_1 and start the Modeling application, if it is


not already active.
The part contains a Through Curves surface that is the base
feature for the solid model shown below. A change is required
that the Through Curve surface needs to be replaced with a
new definition. Since a new definition is required instead of
editing the existing surface, the new surface will be inserted
into the model tree. Then "replace feature" will be used to
incorporate the newly inserted surface in order to maintain
the associativity to all the child features.

Step 2:

Interrogate the existing part to locate the correct features.


Change the Rendering Style to Static Wireframe.
Make layer 81 Selectable.
In the Part Navigator highlight and confirm that Through
Curves(4) is the top defining surface of the model.

5-16

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Step 3:

Change the current feature.


In the Part Navigator make Through Curves(4) the Current
Feature.
Model History
Fixed Datum Plane (0)
Fixed Datum Axis (1)
Fixed Datum Axis (2)
Sketch (3) PROFILE
Through Curves (4)
Projected Curve (33)
Join curve (34)
Sheet Body (35)
Offset (36)
Face Blend (40)

Face Blend (41)


Thicken (42)

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-17

Editing Parametric Models

Step 4:

Insert the new surface definition.


Make layer 53 the Work Layer.
Choose FileImportPart.
Clear the Create Named Group check box.
Set the Layer to Original and choose OK.
Select apd_new_replace_surface_1 from the Import Part
dialog box and choose OK.
In the Point dialog box, Reset the values to XC=0, YC=0,
ZC=0 and choose OK.
Choose Cancel.

5-18

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Step 5:

Replace Through Curves (4).


In the Part Navigator right-click Through Curves(4) , choose
Replace

Through Curves(4) is placed in the Features to Replace


list in the dialog box.

Choose Replacement Features

Select Through Curves (5) from the Eligible Replacement


Features.
Click Add Feature
Features list.

to add the feature to Replacement

Click Parent Map

The Replace Feature dialog box will list the features


that need to be resolved to maintain the integrity of the
part. Also note the graphics screen has split into view
one and view two, this will make it easier to select your
replacement geometry.
Select the new sheet body from TFR-TRI#2 for both required
resolutions.
Click OK.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-19

Editing Parametric Models

Step 6:

Restore all the inactive features.


In the Part Navigator make Thicken Sheet (12) the Current
Feature.

Step 7:

Make layer 1 the Work Layer and all other layers invisible.

Step 8:

Close all parts.

5-20

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Suppress by Expression
This function lets you show or hide selected features in a target body based
on the value of an expression.
Click Suppress by Expression
Expression.

or EditFeatureSuppress by

When you use this function, an expression is automatically created and


associated with a selected feature. When the value of the expression is one,
the feature is not suppressed. When the expression is zero or any other value
than one, the feature is not suppressed.
See Also: DesignModelingEditing ObjectsFeatureSuppress
by Expression
Suppressing Associated Features
To control whether the suppression of a feature by an expression
will also cause the suppression of its child features, you will want
to turn on/off the Suppress by Expression Suppress
Child Features. You will find this in your customer defaults in
the General option under Modeling. The default is checkedon.

When Suppress Child Features is turned on (default), the following rules


apply:

When you suppress a feature that has dependent features, the children
are also suppressed, regardless of whether they have their own suppress
expressions.

Likewise, when you unsuppress a feature, parents of the selected feature


are also unsuppressed. However, if a parent has its own expression which
is equal to zero (suppress), an error will occur during the update.

When you unsuppress a parent feature, the children will not necessarily
unsuppress (unless they share an expression).

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-21

Editing Parametric Models

Suppress by Expression Dialog


You can create and delete Suppression Expressions in the same dialog.

Create for each will create a separate suppress expression for each
selected feature. The dialog displays features that currently have no
suppress expression.

Create shared will create a single suppress expression which is shared by


all selected features. The dialog displays features that currently have no
suppress expression.

Delete for each will delete the selected features suppress expression. The
dialog displays all features which currently have a suppress expression.

Delete shared will delete the selected features shared suppress


expression. The dialog displays all features which contain a shared
suppress expression. If you select a feature, the dialog highlights the
other features which share that same expression.

The List option will generate a report listing each suppressed feature and the
expression that controls it.
All features must have the same state when you create a shared
expression. If they are currently suppressed, the value of their suppress
expression will initially be 0; otherwise it will be 1.

5-22

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Uses of Suppress by Expression


Some uses of this function are described below.

A features suppression state can be related to other expressions so that it


can be removed from the model based on certain size conditions.

The suppression state of a feature may be controlled from a modeling or


part family spreadsheet to establish part variations.

Features can be suppressed from a model under certain conditions to


avoid update errors.

The suppression state of a group of features (such as blends) can be linked


to quickly hide them from the model. (This can also be accomplished by
using the Group Feature function.)

Suppress by Expression is really more of a modeling technique than an


editing technique since it lets you build intelligence into a model and helps
you to control the behavior of a model when the edits occur.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-23

Editing Parametric Models

Activity: Suppressing Features with Expressions


In this activity, you will apply suppress expressions to control the existence of
a strengthening web, based on the length of the part.

Step 1:

Open apd_suppress_1 and start the Modeling application, if it is


not already active.

Step 2:

Create a Suppress Expression for a parent feature.


On the Edit Feature toolbar, click Suppress by Expression
or choose EditFeatureSuppress by Expression.
If it is not already selected, from the Expression Option list,
select Create for Each.
Clear the Add Dependent Features check box.
Select the Instance[0](11)/Extrude(11) feature.
Choose Apply.
Nothing will change in the graphics area. The system
merely generated an expression for the feature. The
value of the expression will default to the current state of
the feature (1 if unsuppressed).
Choose Show Expressions to verify the creation of the
expression p56=1.

5-24

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Step 3:

Test the new Suppress Expression.


Choose ToolsExpression.
Change the Listed Expressions to All.
Change the value of p56 (Instance[0](11)/Extrude(11)
Suppression Status) from 1 to 0.
Choose Apply.
The Extruded feature is suppressed by the expression.
A Unite, two other instances of the web, and two Edge
Blend features are suppressed because they depend on the
Extruded feature.
Sketch (10) WEB
Instance Extrude (11)
Unite (12)

Rectangular Array (13)


Instance[0,1] (13) / Extrude (11)
Rectangular Array (14)
Instance[0,1] (14) / Extrude (11)
Edge Blend (15)
Edge Blend (16)
Edge Blend (17)

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-25

Editing Parametric Models

Change the value of the suppress expression back to 1 and


choose OK.
Note that the extruded feature does not appear in the
graphics area.
The Part Navigator reveals that its children are still
suppressed. The extruded tool body is not suppressed
but it is on another layer (21where it was originally
created).

Step 4:

Unsuppress all features.


Choose EditFeatureUnsuppress and unsuppress all
features in the part (or use the Part Navigator).

5-26

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Step 5:

Delete the existing expression and create a new shared expression.


Choose EditFeatureSuppress by Expression.
From the Expression Option list, choose Delete for each.
Choose Extruded(7) feature from the list and Apply.
From the Expression Option list, choose Create shared.
Select the following features:
Unite(12)
Rectangular Array (13)
Instance[0,1] (13) / Extrude 11)
Rectangular Array (14)

Instance[0,1] (14) / Extrude 11)


Edge Blend (15)
Edge Blend (16)
Choose Apply.
Choose Show Expressions.
The new expression shared by each feature is p57=1.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-27

Editing Parametric Models

Step 6:

Rename and test the new shared expression.


Choose ToolsExpression.
Find the expression p57 and rename it to show_gusset.
Change the value of show_gusset to 0 and update the part.
The suppression of the Extruded feature and its children are
now controlled by the expression show_gusset (Extruded(7)
Suppression Status).
Change the value back to 1 and update the part.

Step 7:

Create a Conditional Expression to suppress the gusset using the


existing expression len (Block(0) Size Y).
Choose ToolsExpression.
Locate the expression len (Block(0) Size Y).

Change the show_gusset expression from =1 to


=if(len>125)(1)else(0).
Change the value of len to 100 to test the conditional
expression.
Step 8:

5-28

Close your part.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

When Model Updates Fail


Parametric Modeling lets you create intentional feature relationships based
on design intent. These relationships can facilitate efficient modeling creation
and editing practices.
However, some model edits naturally fail when associative links between
features are lost. This commonly happens with:

Boolean Operations (tool body completely inside/outside of target body)

Thru Features (associated to faces)

Trim Features (associated to faces)

Blends (associated to edges)

Defining strings (gaps or multiple loops in string, ambiguous string


objects)

Reattach features (cannot reference a later object)

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-29

Editing Parametric Models

If update fails either the Edit During Update dialog box or an Error upon
Update message appears.
If the editing operations cannot be performed safely, and Error upon Update
message appears.
If a failure occurs the Edit During Update dialog box appears.
The Edit During Update dialog box explains the error and lets you choose
how to proceed.

In many cases, you do not need to use Undo to restore the model to its
previous condition. With this dialog, you may accept, delete, suppress, or edit
the parameters of the feature(s) that caused the update failure.

5-30

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

There are check boxes in Modeling Preferences that control how NX deals
with errors and warnings:
If Interrupt Update on Error is selected, the Edit During Update dialog
box appears when errors are encountered during playback.
If Interrupt Update on Warning is selected, the Edit During Update dialog
box appears when warning messages are generated during playback.
If Feature Alerts is selected, alerts appear in a message box instead of
on the Status Line.
Alerts are presented in one of three forms:
An ErrorA problem with input geometry or parameters that will not
allow you to update the feature successfully.
A WarningA serious problem, but the feature can still be created or
updated. It is best to investigate these.
An Information MessageInformation on a change to the featurethat
is generally not problematic. It can be successfully created or updated.
If Generate Update Failure Report is selected, a failure report is sent to
an Information Window when features fail to update.
See Also: DesignModelingModeling PreferencesModeling
Preferences General

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-31

Editing Parametric Models

Out of Date Features


Accepting features that fail to update will hide them and assign an update
failed status while allowing the update to continue. These features will be
marked as out of date in the Part Navigator (by the Status and Out of Date
columns) and in dialogs containing feature lists by an exclamation point ! .
The Update Status option in the Feature Browser allows you to list all
features that are currently out of date and their reasons for failure. Editing
the failed feature to resolve the problem will automatically remove the update
failed status and unsuppress the feature.

5-32

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Part navigator Status column


A features status is indicated by a status icon next to its Name and possibly a
message that is displayed in the Status column.
Symbol

Status column
No text Normal state
Suppressed
Display is controlled by an expression
Suppressed by expression
Modified
Inactive
Update Failed

Failed Inactive an inactive feature failed to update


No symbol Displayed the currently displayed view in the Model View node
Out of date
No symbol Alive the node is active
No symbol Missing Parents an unparented datum CSYS

See Also: DesignModelingModeling ToolsPart NavigatorPart


Navigator Column names and Icons

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-33

Editing Parametric Models

Preventing the Deletion of Child Features


Sometimes it may be necessary to delete a feature due to an engineering
change or update failure. By default, if the feature is a parent to child
features, those child features would also be deleted.
If you do not want the deletion of parent features to propagate to their child
features, you may change the customer defaults setting in the NX. When
this checkbox is checked off and a parent feature is deleted, the Edit during
Update dialog will appear for each child and allow you to explicitly accept,
delete, blank, or edit (reattach) it.
Customer Defaults can be found FileUtilitiesCustomer
DefaultsModelingGeneral , choose the Delete and Suppress tab.

5-34

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Modeling for Editing Flexibility


Some industries, such as consumer products, may require that models
undergo drastic topological changes right before production begins. In these
situations, it can neither be assumed that a pocket will always be rectangular
in shape nor a face will always be planar.
The following techniques may be applied when initially modeling parts that
are expected to undergo major changes. While some of these techniques
require investment of more time during construction, they will reduce the
time required to edit the model throughout its lifecycle.

Try to create as many datums early in the modeling process as possible


and use them consistently as a reference for placement faces and/or
positioning. This minimizes the number of levels of feature dependency.

When positioning features, use perpendicular dimensions, instead of


horizontal and vertical, if it still satisfies design intent. Perpendicular
dimensions do not require a horizontal reference, which is another
dependency that may fail later.

Try to reference edges that are stable. Some edges are formed by the
intersection of faces belonging to different features and are more likely to
be removed or subdivided during future edits.

Apply blends to the part as late as possible.

If a blend is expected to change, edit the radius and test minimum and
maximum values to ensure that failure will not occur during a later edit.

If topological changes are expected, consider using sketches and extruded


features (or general pads and pockets) instead of form features. This
allows more flexibility in changing the feature profile or trim faces.

When defining extruded and revolved features, consider choosing Create


initially, and adding the Boolean operation later. A Boolean can be
suppressed independently or edited to replace the target and tool body. (If
suppressed the tool body will appear on the layer on which it was created.)

Consider using Trim rather than the Subtract operation. A surface can
be replaced for a trim feature without losing dependent features such as
blends and hollows. The Trim operation also retains the original sheet
bodies.

Consider using the Retain Tool option when performing Boolean


operations, particularly Subtract and Intersect. This will keep the original
tool body intact for later editing. Be sure to watch layer assignments, so
that the retained tool bodies are kept separate from the main design body.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-35

Editing Parametric Models

Activity: Replacing Defining Strings and Surfaces


In this activity, you will replace the defining strings and surfaces in a part
that was modeled for editing flexibility.
Step 1:

Open apd_edit_1 and start the Modeling application, if it is not


already active.

Step 2:

Examine the Part Navigator feature tree.


Open the Part Navigator and make sure it is in Timestamp
Order.

Since the designer expected significant changes to the part,


sketches, extruded bodies, and trim features were used so
that the part surfaces could easily be replaced.

5-36

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Step 3:

Change the shape of the pad.


Make layer 23 Selectable.
Double-click the Extrude (23) "EXTRUDE_PAD" feature in the
Part Navigator.
In the Section group of the dialog box, with Select Curve (4)
active, shift-select the line (1), and select the arc (2).

5
You may need to click Allow Selection of Hidden
(on the Selection Bar)or change the
Wireframe
Rendering Style to one of the wireframe methods to be
able to select the arc.
Click OK.
Note the shape of the pad updated while preserving the
blends and taper.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-37

Editing Parametric Models

Step 4:

Replace the upper surfaces of the base and pad.


Make layer 11 Selectable.

In the Part Navigator, double-click Trim Body (21)


"TRIM_BASE" feature.
In the Tool group of the dialog box, with Select Face or Plane
(1) active, deselect the highlighted Datum Plane.

Select the lower sheet body.


The normal vector should be pointing upward
Click OK.
Edit the Trim Body (25) "TRIM_PAD" feature with the upper
sheet body.
Click OK.
The edits to the trim features also preserved the blends and
taper.

5-38

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Editing Parametric Models

Step 5:

Close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

5-39

Editing Parametric Models

Summary
A model may undergo many changes throughout its lifecycle. In this lesson
you applied techniques that helped prevent or remedy update failures when
these changes were made.
In this lesson you:

Reordered features to allow the selection of a new placement face.

Created a conditional expression that controls the suppression of a feature


based on the part length.

Identified a setting in the customer defaults file to prevent the deletion of


a feature from propagating to its children.

Identified modeling techniques that can be applied during construction


that will reduce potential problems during major changes.

5-40

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Lesson

Associative Curve Operations


Purpose
Some features require the use of curves that are derived from existing
geometry in the model. Several operations can be used to generate curves
associatively and capture design intent.
Objective
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

Offset curves.

Project curves.

Join curves.

Intersect curves.

Wrap curves.

Projected Curves in a Sketch.

Offset Extracted Curves in a Sketch.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-1

Associative Curve Operations

Associativity of Curve Operations


Most of the curve operation dialogs provide an option to generate associative
output curves. This capability is made to support a hybrid modeling approach
to modeling if associativity and full parametric control are not desired, the
associative function can be checked off.
If you are incorporating a curve operation into a parametric model, it is
important that you utilize the associative output capability to capture design
intent. The resulting curves can then be updated by editing their parent
geometry or associated expressions.
When associative options are used in a curve operation, the resulting
curves appear as a feature in the Part Navigator feature tree with the
appropriate Timestamp. Editing the parameters of these features will
allow you to change the options or select a new parent to define them.

Sketch (6) PROFILE


Instance Extruded (7)
Offset Curve (9)

6-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Project Curves
You can project curves, edges, and points onto sheet bodies, faces, planes
and datum planes by using the Project Curve option. You can direct your
projection toward, or at an angle to, a specified vector, a point, or along face
normals. The projected curves are trimmed at holes or edges of the faces.
From the Curve toolbar:
or
On the Curve toolbar, click Project
choose InsertCurve From CurvesProject.

See Also: DesignModelingCreating Objects from the Insert Menu

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-3

Associative Curve Operations

Usage Considerations for the Associate Option


Choosing the Associate check box (in the Settings group) leaves the original
(defining) curves or points in place, and creates projected curves or points
that are associated to the original objects and to the selected faces and planes.

6-4

If the defining objects or the selected faces/planes are modified, the


projected curve features update to match the changes.

If an entire sketch is projected, any curves added to the sketch are also
added to the projection. If a curve in the sketch is converted to reference,
the associated curve in the projection is removed.

If the projection direction method is Toward a Point or Toward a Line,


the projected curve features update if the specified point, line, or datum
axis is moved.

A defining curve/point or plane cannot be deleted unless its associated


projected curve feature is first deleted. However, if a defining face is
deleted (by deleting or editing the parent body), the projected curve
feature is also deleted.

If you create a curve projection using the Associative check box, the
resulting set of curves/points is a feature and can be edited with either
EditCurveParameters or EditFeatureEdit Parameters.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Procedure: Create Project Curves


To create associative projection curves, follow these steps:
1. On the Curve toolbar, click the Project
From CurvesProject.

or choose InsertCurve

2. Using the Curve or Point to Project group of the dialog box, select the
curves, edges or points you want to project.
3. Using the Objects to Project To group, select the faces or planes on which
to project the selected curves or edges.
4. Choose the Projection Direction method, then specify the point, line,
datum axis, vector and/or angle, as needed.
5. Select the Associative check box.
6. Choose the Curve Fit Method.
7. Choose the Join Curvs method.
8. If necessary enter a Tolerance.

9. Click OK.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-5

Associative Curve Operations

Activity: Project Curves


In this activity, you will project curves to create an associative seal groove
on a non-planar face.
Step 1:

Open apd_seal_groove, save as ***_seal_groove and start the


Modeling application, if it is not already active.

6-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Step 2:

Project the offset curves to define the groove centerline.


Use the Part Navigator to become familiar with the existing
geometry.
Change the Work Layer to 42.

On the Curve toolbar, click Project


InsertCurve From CurvesProject.

or choose

In the Settings group of the dialog box, make sure the


Associate check box is selected.
In the Projection Direction group, from the Direction list,
choose Along Vector.

With Specify Vector (0) active, choose ZC Axis

In the Curves or Points to Project group, make Select Curve


or Point (0) active.
From the Curve Rule list (on the Selection Bar) select
Connected Curves.

Select one of the Offset Curves (the inner set of curves) and
advance to the next selection step.
In the Objects to Project To group, make Select Object (0)
active, and select the top face of the solid.
Click OK.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-7

Associative Curve Operations

Step 3:

Create the seal groove.


On the Feature toolbar, click Tube
InsertSweepTube.

or choose

Create a Multiple Segment Tube with an Outer Diameter of


7.0. Use the projected curves as the path and Subtract it from
the solid.

Step 4:

Test the associativity of the model.


Change the following Sketch expressions and update the model.
Len from 139.7 to 152.
Wid from 127.0 to 140.0.

Step 5:

6-8

Save the part but do not close it. You will be using it in the next
activity.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Join Curves
This function joins together a chain of curves and/or edges to create a single
B-spline curve. The result is either a polynomial spline that approximates
the original chain, or a general spline that exactly represents the original
chain of curves. The Join option is a convenient way of creating a spline,
rather than building one from scratch.
From the Curve toolbar:
Click Join Curves

or choose InsertCurve From CurvesJoin.

See Also: DesignModelingCreating Objects from the Insert Menu

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-9

Associative Curve Operations

Usage Considerations

In the Settings group of the dialog box, the Angle Tolerance will affect the
results of the Join operation. If the angle between adjacent input curves is
larger than the angle tolerance, the resulting spline will contain a sharp
corner and a message will be displayed to inform you of this fact.

The Distance Tolerance will also affect the results of the Join operation.
If the gap between the ends of adjacent input curves is larger than the
distance tolerance, the join operation cannot be performed. Otherwise, a
continuous spline is approximated between the curves.

If a closed loop of curves is selected and the starting and ending points
of the loop are not tangent continuous, an open spline is created. If the
starting and ending points are tangent continuous, a closed spline is
created.

6-10

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Procedure: Create Join Curves


To associatively join a set of curves, perform the following steps:
1. On the Curve from Curves tooolbar, click Join
InsertCurve From CurvesJoin.

or choose

2. Select the curves or edges you wish to join.


3. Select the desired Output Curve Type.
4. Select the Associative check box.
5. Choose the desired Input Curves option from the list.
For associative curves, Keep or Hide.
6. Click OK.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-11

Associative Curve Operations

Activity: Join Curves


In this activity, you will apply the join curves operation and a geometric
expression to determine the total length of a groove centerline.
Step 1:

Continue using the part ***_seal_groove.

Step 2:

Join the guide string into a single, associative spline.


Make layer 43 the Work Layer and layers 1 and 21 Invisible.

On the Curve toolbar, click Join


From CurvesJoin.

or choose InsertCurve

Ensure that the Curve Rule (on the Selection Bar) is set to
Tangent Curves.
In the Join Curves dialog box, make sure Select Curve (0) is
active and select one of the projected curves used as the tube
guide string.
In the Settings group, Set the Output Curve Type to General.
Make sure the Associative check box is selected.
From the Input Curves list, select Hide.
Click OK.

6-12

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Step 3:

Create a Length Expression for the newly created Joined curve.


Choose AnalysisMeasure Length.
In the Associative Measure and Checking group, select the
Associative check box (this will create an expression to save
the measurement).
In the Curve group, make sure Select Curve (0) is active, and
select the joined spline.
In the Results Display group, select Show Dimension (from
the Annotation list).
Click OK.
Select ToolsExpression
Select the length expression that you just created and note the
value. It should be similar to p51 (Length Measurement (15))
Rename the expression to groove_len.
Click OK.

Step 4:

Test the associativity of the part.


Change the following Sketch expressions and update the model.
Len from 152.0 to 165.0.
Wid from 140.0 to 152.4.
Choose Apply.
Note the change to the expression groove_len in the graphics
window.

Step 5:

Save and close the part.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-13

Associative Curve Operations

Intersection Curves
This option allows you to create intersection curves between two sets of
objects. Intersection curves are associative and update according to the
changes in their defining objects. You can select multiple objects in the input
sets to perform an intersection operation.
On the Curve toolbar, click Intersection Curves
or choose InsertCurve From BodiesIntersect.

Intersecting two datum planes produces a non-associative line that


extends to the view boundaries. If associativity is desired, a datum axis
should be created at the intersection of the two planes.
See Also: DesignModelingCreating Objects from the Insert Menu

6-14

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Usage Considerations
The type of geometry you select for either Set 1 or Set 2 will determine the
number of objects you can choose.

You may select more than one face in a set, but all faces in a set must be
part of the same sheet or solid body.

You may select only one datum plane for each set.

You may build a datum plane on the fly by choosing the Plane Constructor
button in the dialog box.

You may select only one sheet or solid body for each set.

If the Keep Selected check box is selected, you can reuse the objects selected
as Set 1 or Set 2.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-15

Associative Curve Operations

Procedure: Create Intersection Curve


1. Click Intersection Curves
BodiesIntersect.

or choose InsertCurve From

2. In the Set 1 group of the dialog box, with Select Face (x) active select the
first set of faces or use Specify Plane to select or specify a datum plane.
3. In the Set 2 group of the dialog box, with Select Face (x) active select the
second set of faces or use Specify Plane to select or specify a datum plane.
4. Define the Curve Fit Method, and check the Tolerance.
5. Select the Associative check box.
6. Click OK.

6-16

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Activity: Intersection Curves


In this activity, you will use the intersect curve operation to create an
associative curve that can be used to subdivide a face and apply a taper.
Step 1:

Open apd_intersect_1 and start the Modeling application, if it is


not already active.

Step 2:

Create an associative intersection curve.


Make layer 41 the Work Layer.

On the Curve toolbar, click Intersection Curves


InsertCurve From BodiesIntersect

or choose

Make sure the Associative check box is selected.


Select the datum plane for Set 1.
Select the top planar face of the base for Set 2.

If not already done, set the Curve Fit Method to Cubic.


Click OK.
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-17

Associative Curve Operations

Step 3:

Subdivide the face with the intersection curve.


On the Feature Operation toolbar, click Divide Face
choose InsertTrimDivide Face.

, or

If not already set, from the Projection Direction list, select


Normal to Face.
In the Settings group, select the Hide Dividing Objects check
box.
Select the top planar face (the one on which the Intersection
curve lies) for the Faces to Divide.
Make sure the Curve Rule (in the Selection Bar) is set to
Feature Curves, and Select the intersection curve as the
Dividing Object.
Click OK.

6-18

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Step 4:

Apply draft to the top face from the new edge.


On the Feature Operation toolbar, click Draft
InsertDetail FeatureDraft.

or choose

From the Type list, select From Edges.

In the Draw Direction group, choose Plane Normal

In the Draw Direction group, with Specify Vector (1) active,


select the existing Datum Plane.
Enter an Angle 1 of 12.
In the Stationary Edges group, with Select Edge (0) active,
select the new subdividing edge.
Click Apply.
This applies the draft to the one side of the face.

Choose Plane Normal for the Draw Direction

With Specify Vector (1) active, select the existing Datum Plane.
If necessary choose Reverse Direction.
Select the new subdividing edge.
Click OK.

Although you did not exit out of the Draft dialog you
have created two separate Draft features. View the Part
Navigator to see the results.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-19

Associative Curve Operations

Step 5:

Test the associativity of the part.


Make layer 61 Invisible.
Change the formula for the expression named angle from 9
to 20 and update the model.
The angle expression changes the orientation of the
datum plane which was used to define the associative
intersection curve and taper.

Step 6:

Close all parts.

6-20

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Wrap/Unwrap Curves
This option lets you wrap curves from a plane onto a conical or cylindrical
face, or unwrap curves from a conical or cylindrical face onto a plane. The
output curves are B-splines with a degree of 3, and are associative to their
input curves, the defining face, and the defining plane.
From the Curve toolbar:
or
On the Curves toobar, click Wrap/Unwrap
choose InsertCurve From CurvesWrap/Unwrap.

6
See Also: DesignModelingCreating Objects from the Insert Menu

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-21

Associative Curve Operations

Usage Considerations

6-22

A Wrap Face is the cylindrical or conical face about which curves are
wrapped or unwrapped. If you have a cylindrical or conical face that is
split by a groove or some other feature, you may choose multiple faces
for the Wrap Face. However, these faces, if uninterrupted, must form a
single cylindrical or conical face.

A Wrap Plane is the plane which is tangent to the Wrap Face. For Wrap,
the selected curves that lie on this plane are wrapped onto the Wrap Face.
Selected curves that are not on this plane are first projected onto this
plane, normal to the plane, and then wrapped onto the Wrap Face. For
Unwrap, the selected curves are unwrapped onto this plane. This may
be a datum plane or a planar or trimmed planar face. However, if a face
is used, it is treated as a boundless plane and the resulting unwrapped
curves will extend as far as necessary, regardless of the face boundaries.

You may select curves, edges, or faces. If you select faces, all the face
edges will be selected.

The Tangent Line is the imaginary line that represents where the Wrap
Plane and the Wrap Face touch each other. This line is parallel with the
cylinder or cone axis.

The Cut Line applies to the Unwrap operation and is an imaginary line
that represents the Tangent Line rotated about the Wrap Face axis
according to the Cut Line Angle value. The Cut Line Angle value controls
where the unwrapped curves will be located relative to the Tangent Line
after the feature is created. If a closed curve on the Wrap Face that
completely encircles the face axis is being unwrapped, it will be split at
the Cut Line.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

The following figure illustrates the various objects associated with the
Wrap/Unwrap function.
1
2
3
4

Unwrapped Cut Line


Cut Line
Wrap Face
Wrap Plane

5
6
7

Tangent Line
Unwrapped Cone bottom
Unwrapped Cone top

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-23

Associative Curve Operations

Procedure: Wrap/Unwrap Curves


To Wrap/Unwrap curves from a plane to a face:
1. Click Wrap/Unwrap

or InsertCurve From CurvesWrap/Unwrap.

2. Choose either the Wrap or Unwrap option.

3.

Select the cylindrical or conical geometry for the Wrap Face.

4.

Select the plane for the Wrap Plane.

5.

Select the Curves.

6. Enter the Cut Line Angle (for Unwrap only).


7. Click OK.
When using Wrap, if the selected curves do not lie on the wrap
plane, they are first projected to the wrap plane (normal to the
plane) and then wrapped onto the selected face.

When using Unwrap, if the selected curves do not lie on the wrap
face, they are first projected to the wrap face, normal to the face,
and then unwrapped onto the wrap plane.

6-24

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Activity: Wrap Curves


In this activity, you will create associative wrapped curves around a cylinder
to produce the guide path for a cam follower groove.
Step 1:

Open apd_wrap_curves_1 and start the Modeling application, if


it is not already active.

Step 2:

Wrap a set of curves around a cylinder.


Change the work layer to 41.

On the Curve toolbar, click Wrap/Unwrap Curve


choose InsertCurve From CurvesWrap/Unwrap.

or

Select the cylindrical face as the Wrap Face.


Select the datum plane as the Wrap Plane.
If necessary select the Wrap option.
Select all seven of the Curves to wrap.
Click OK.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-25

Associative Curve Operations

Step 3:

Create the cam follower groove.


On the Feature toolbar, click Tube
InsertSweepTube.

, or choose

With Select Curve (0) (in the Path group) active, use Tangent
Curves (on the Selection Bar, in the Curve Rule list) select any
of the Wrap Curves you created.
In the Cross Section group of the dialog box, for the Outer
Diameter enter 10, in the Boolean group, select Subtract, and
then click OK.

Step 4:

6-26

Close all parts.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Sketch Projected Curves


Lets you create curves, strings of curves, or points by projecting external
objects onto a sketch along the normal of the sketch plane. You can project a
curve associatively or non-associatively onto a sketch.
From the Sketch Operations toolbar:
Click Project Curve

See Also: DesignSketcherSketch Operations Toolbar

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-27

Associative Curve Operations

Usage Notes

You can select, curves, edges, faces, other sketches and points for
projection. All objects must have an earlier timestamp than the sketch.

Selected objects are projected onto the plane of the sketch along a vector
normal to the sketch plane.

If a face is selected, its edges are automatically selected for projection.


The projected string updates, as necessary, when topological changes are
made to the face and its edges. Increases or decreases in the number of
edges are reflected in the projected string.

Projected strings act as fixed curves within the sketch. They can
be referenced but not altered by dimensional and geometric sketch
constraints.

A contiguous projected string can be used to apply a Point on String


geometric constraint. You cannot apply a Point on String constraint
using a non-contiguous projected string created from a face that includes
multiple edge boundaries.

You can add, remove, or replace curves projected into a sketch with the
Edit Curves option in the Sketch Tools dialog. projected points cannot be
edited.

A sketch cannot contain both positioning dimensions and projected curves.


If your sketch contains one, and you try to create the other, you will get an
error message.

The Project Curve dialog box allows you to determine the Output Curve Type
for projected curves.
Original The extracted curves are created with their original geometry
types.
Spline Segment The extracted curves are represented by individual
splines.
Single Spline The extracted curves are connected and represented by
a single spline.
Select the Associative check box to project the curves associatively into the
sketch. Associated objects maintain a link to the original geometry.
Tolerance will determine whether the string of objects is contiguous when
projected onto the sketch plane.

6-28

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Procedure: Creating Projected Curves in Sketch


1. Click Project Curve

2. Select the curve string, face, edges or points you want to project onto
the sketch plane.
3.

Select the Associative check box.

4.

From the Output Curve Type list, select the desired setting.

5.

Click OK.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-29

Associative Curve Operations

Sketch Offset Projected Curves


This option lets you offset associative and non-associative curves within the
context of a Sketch.
You can offset associative curves from curves you have projected with the
Project option. In this case, NX creates an Offset geometric constraint.
Modifying the original curve results in an update of both the projected curve
and the offset curve. Curves that have been offset associatively are always
single splines.
From the Sketch Operations toolbar:
On the Sketcdh Operations toolbar, click Offset Curves

See Also: DesignSketcherSketch Operations Toolbar

6-30

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Usage Notes

You can only select curves to offset that have been Projected in the Sketch
using the Project option.

You cannot offset a curve that has already been offset, but you can trim
such a curve.

A trimmed curve can only be offset if it is bounded by objects that are


not members of the sketch.

You can delete an offset constraint using the Show/Remove Constraints


option.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-31

Associative Curve Operations

Procedure: Creating Projected Curves in Sketch


1. Click Offset Curves

2. Select the associative projected curves.


3. Specify the Distance.
4. Set the Trim option.
5. Set the Tolerance and Number of Copies.
6. Verify the Direction.
7. Choose OK.

6-32

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Activity: Project Curves in a Sketch


In this activity, you will extract curves from solid edges into a sketch and
offset them to form a single curve which can be used to constrain other sketch
curves.
Step 1:

Open apd_extract_sketch_1 and start the Modeling application, if


it is not already active.

Step 2:

Create a sketch on the front face of the part.


Create a Sketch

named OFFSET_HOLES on layer 23.

Select the front face (1) as the placement face and the bottom
edge (2) as the horizontal reference . Make sure the sketch
plane Z direction is away from the center of the part, and the X
direction is to the right.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-33

Associative Curve Operations

Step 3:

Project objects onto the new Sketch.


In the Sketcher toolbar, click Orient View to Model

Click Project Curve

From the Output Type list, select Original.


Select the Associative check box.
Select the four lower edges of the cutout as the objects to
project.

Click OK.

6-34

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Step 4:

Create and constrain a circle in the Sketch.


Click Orient View to Sketch

Create a 12mm diameter circle.


Add a Diameter Dimensional Constraint

Click Constraints

Select the center of the circle as the first object.


Place the cursor over one of the projected curves and wait for
the Quick Pick tool to appear.
Select the string option.

Click Point on String

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-35

Associative Curve Operations

The circle is now constrained to lie along the extracted string


of curves.

Click Constraints

to turn off the function.

Place the cursor over the center of the circle and wait for the
Quick Pick tool to appear.
Select the arc.
Place the cursor over the edge of the arc, and drag to the right.

6-36

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Step 5:

Offset the projected curves.


Click Offset Curve

Key in 8.0 for the Distance.


In the Curve Rule list, select Connected Curves and select
any of the projected curves.
You want the projected curves to move away from the center
of the part, or outboard.
If necessary click Reverse Direction.
If the Create Dimension check box is selected, you will later
be able to edit the offset value directly from the graphics
window, without accessing the Offset Curve dialog box.
Click OK.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-37

Associative Curve Operations

Step 6:

Create and constrain another circle in the sketch.


Create another circle in the Sketch.

Add the Dimensional Constraints

shown below:

Add a Point on Curve geometric constraint so that the circle

lies on the Offset Curve

Notice that Point on String is not available for Offset


Curves.

6-38

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Associative Curve Operations

Turn off Constraints.

Choose Finish Sketch


Step 7:

Close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

6-39

Associative Curve Operations

Summary
Curve operations can be used to create associative curves that are used to
define features and capture design intent.
In this lesson you applied the following curve operations:

Project

Join

Intersect

Wrap

Projected Curves to a Sketch

Offset Curves in a Sketch

6-40

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Lesson

General Pockets and Pads


Purpose
General pockets and pads offer greater flexibility than cylindrical and
rectangular options, allowing non-planar placement faces and different top
and bottom outlines. The placement faces and outlines may later be edited.
Objective
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

Identify the advantages of general pockets and pads.

Create a pocket on a non-planar placement face.

Create a pocket with different placement and floor outlines.

Create and edit a general pad.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-1

General Pockets and Pads

General Pocket
This option lets you define and edit a Pocket with greater flexibility than the
Cylindrical and Rectangular Pocket options.
See Also: DesignModelingCreating Objects from the Insert
MenuDesign Feature
There are four potential elements needed to create a General Pocket:

A Placement Face (1)

A Placement Outline (2)

A Floor Face (3)

A Floor Outline (4)

In some cases, a single General Pocket feature can be used to define a shape
that would otherwise require the creation of several other features (extruded
features, freeform features, offsets, trims, Booleans, blends etc.).

7-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

General Pockets and Pads

Advantages

Placement (top) and floor (bottom) faces can be non-planar.

Placement and floor faces can be offset from each other or offset from
other selected faces.

Multiple faces can be selected to define the placement and floor face.

Placement and floor outlines do not have to be the same shape.

The placement and floor outlines do not have to lie on the placement and
floor faces. They can be projected along a specified vector.

A placement radius can be defined to create a blend at the intersection of


the sides of the pocket and the placement face.

If a placement or floor radius is entered, you can specify whether the


outline represents the theoretical intersection of the sides and the face or
the tangent edges between the blend and the face.

Disadvantages

Placement or floor outline curves that are not lines generate B-Surface
type faces and intersection type edges which may be difficult to use for
positioning features or mating constraints.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-3

General Pockets and Pads

General Pocket Dialog


From the Form Feature toolbar:
Click Pocket

or choose InsertDesign FeaturePocket.

7-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

General Pockets and Pads

Selection Steps
There are ten possible selection steps to define a general pocket, but only
a few of the steps are required for most applications. The only required
selections are the Placement Face and either the Placement Outline or Floor
Outline. The Floor Face may be offset or translated from the Placement Face.

Placement Face
The placement face is one or more selected faces, or a single plane or datum
plane. The top of the pocket follows the contours of the placement face.

Placement Outline
There are two way to define the Placement Outline:

Select contiguous curves for the outline of the top of the pocket. These
curves are projected onto the placement face(s) based on the Placement
Outline Projection Vector setting.

The From Floor Outline option will let you define the Placement Outline
using a Taper Angle.

Floor Face
Lets you define the floor face(s) for the contour of the bottom of the pocket. If
the floor face is not selected explicitly, it may be offset or translated from the
placement face or another selected face.

Floor Outline
Lets you select the contiguous curves for the outline of the bottom of the
pocket. The floor outline may also be defined by tapering the Placement
Outline.
If Floor Outline curves are selected and a floor radius is entered, an option is
available to indicate whether the curves represent the theoretical intersection
of the wall faces and floor or the tangent edges on the floor face.
Both the Floor Outline and the Placement Outline need to follow the
same direction to correctly define the General Pocket. You can use the
Reverse option to modify the direction of either outline.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-5

General Pockets and Pads

Target Body
You can select a target body if you want the pocket to be in a different body
than the one that the first selected placement face belongs to. This is an
optional selection. If you do not select a target body, it will be defined from
the placement face. This step is required if a fixed datum plane is selected
as the placement face.

Placement Outline Projection Vector


The placement outline projection vector specifies how the placement outline
curves are to be projected onto the placement face, if they are not already on
the face. The default setting is Normal to Plane of Curves.

Floor Face Translation Vector


If you choose to define the floor face as a translation of the placement face, this
selection step becomes available to allow definition of the translation vector.

Floor Outline Projection Vector


Lets you define the vector that will define the projection of the floor outline
onto the floor face. The default setting is Normal to Plane of Curves.

Placement Alignment Points


Lets you select points on the placement outline curves for alignment. This
step is available if curves have been selected for both outlines and if you have
chosen Specify Points for the Outline Alignment Method.
Floor Alignment Points
Lets you select points on the floor outline curves for alignment. This step
is available if curves have been selected for both outlines, and if you have
chosen Specify Points for the Outline Alignment Method.

7-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

General Pockets and Pads

Other Options
Outline Alignment Method
If both placement and floor outlines are selected, an option to define the
alignment method becomes available to control the shape of the walls of the
pocket as they transition between the outlines.

Align Ends is the default setting and should be used if the outlines are
similar in shape and each contain the same number of curves.

Specify Points will activate the Placement Alignment Points and Floor
Alignment Points steps which allow you specify points on each outline
to control the alignment. The same number of points must be specified
in each outline.

The Parametric option automatically spaces alignment points at equal


parameter intervals along the outlines.

Placement Radius
Lets you define the blend radius between the placement face (the top of the
pocket) and the sides of the pocket.
Floor Radius
Lets you define the blend radius between the floor face (the bottom of the
pocket) and the sides of the pocket.
Corner Radius
Lets you define the blend radius placed on the corners of the pocket. A
corner is located at a joint between two outline curves/edges whose tangent
difference varies by more than the angle tolerance.
Attach Pocket
Lets you sew the pocket to a target sheet body, or subtract the pocket from
a target solid body. If this option is not selected, the pocket is created as
a separate solid body.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-7

General Pockets and Pads

Activity: Creating a Pocket


In this activity, you will create a general pocket with a given outline on a
non-planar placement face. The floor face of the pocket will be offset from the
placement face.
Step 1:

Open apd_general_pocket_1 and start the Modeling application,


if it is not already active.
The part contains an extruded sketch and a sketch defining the
placement outline of what will be a pocket.

7-8

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

General Pockets and Pads

Step 2:

Create a general pocket.


On the Feature toolbar, click Pocket
InsertDesign FeaturePocket.

, or choose

Choose General.

Select the cylindrical face as the Placement Face

A reference vector will appear indicating a direction for


the pocket depth.

Advance to the Placement Outline step

Set the Curve Rule list to Feature Curves.


Select one of the four lines as the Placement Outline.

Advance to the Floor Face Selection Step

Set Floor Face to Offset and enter a From Placement offset


value of 25.0.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-9

General Pockets and Pads

Advance to the Floor Outline step

Set the Taper Angle to 0.0 and is measured relative to Face


Normals.
Set the Placement Radius, Floor Radius, and Corner Radius
to 0.0.
Select the Attach Pocket check box.
Click OK twice.

Step 3:

Close all parts.

7-10

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

General Pockets and Pads

Activity: Creating a Pocket with Multiple Floor Faces


In this activity, you will create a general pocket having different shaped
placement and floor faces. The floor of the pocket will be offset from the
bottom faces of the part.
Step 1:

Open apd_general_pocket_2 and start the Modeling application,


if it is not already active.
The part contains an existing solid and a sketch defining the
profile for a new pocket. Note the bottom of the part is made up of
multiple faces.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-11

General Pockets and Pads

Step 2:

Create a general pocket.


Click Pocket

Choose General.

Select the top face as the Placement Face

Select the Sketch curves for the Placement Outline

Select the three bottom faces as the Floor Face

Set Floor Face to Offset and enter a Of Selected Floor offset


value of 6.5.

7-12

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

General Pockets and Pads

Advance to the Floor Outline step

Set the Taper Angle to 0.0 and is measured relative to Face


Normals.
If necessary set the Placement and Floor Radius to 0.0.
Set the Corner Radius to 5.1.
Click OK twice.

Step 3:

Close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-13

General Pockets and Pads

General Pad
This option lets you define and edit a Pad with greater flexibility than the
Rectangular Pad options.
See Also: DesignModelingCreating Objects from the Insert
MenuDesign Feature
Advantages

Placement (bottom) and top faces can be non-planar.

Placement or top faces can be offset from each other or from other faces.

Multiple faces can be selected to define the placement or top.

The curves do not have to form a closed string. They can be open. You can
also let the string extend beyond the edges of the placement faces.

The placement and top outlines do not have to lie on the placement and
top faces. They can be projected along a specified vector.

A placement radius can be defined to create a blend at the intersection


of the sides of the pad and the placement face.

If a placement or top radius is entered, you can specify whether the


outline represents the theoretical intersection of the sides and the face or
the tangent edges between the blend and the face.

Disadvantages

7-14

Placement or top outline curves that are not lines generate B-Surface
type faces and intersection type edges which may be difficult to use for
positioning features or mating constraints.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

General Pockets and Pads

General Pad Dialog box


The dialog box and procedure for creating a General Pad are similar to the
General Pocket except Top faces and profiles are defined instead of Floor
faces and profiles.
From the Feature toolbar:
Click Pad

or choose InsertDesign FeaturePad.

There are four potential elements needed to create a General Pad:

A Placement Face (1)

A Placement Outline (2)

A Top Face (3)

A Top Outline (4)

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-15

General Pockets and Pads

Activity: Creating General Pad and Pocket


In this activity, you will create an intake port for a small motor consisting of a
general pad and a general pocket. The pocket will define the intake opening
and have different placement and floor outlines.
Step 1:

Open apd_general_pocket_3. Save the part as


***_general_pocket_3 and start the Modeling application, if it is
not already active.
Interrogate your part using the Part Navigator.
The part contains a sketch defining the opening of the intake
where it intersects the internal face of the motor along with its
placement face and horizontal reference (datums).

7-16

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

General Pockets and Pads

Step 2:

Review the Sketch Intake 2. This will be used later in the activity.
Locate Sketch (86) INTAKE_2 in the Part Navigator.
Double-click on the feature to activate the sketch.

Click Show Remove Constraints

In the List Constraints for group, choose All In Active Sketch..


Set Constraint Type to All
If it is not already selected, choose Include.
Cycle through the list of constraints to become familiar with
established relationships.

Choose Finish Sketch

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-17

General Pockets and Pads

Step 3:

Create a sketch for the intake pad.


Create a Sketch (on Layer 26) named INTAKE_PAD.
Use the Datum Plane as the placement face and the Datum
Axis (YC) as the horizontal reference.
Create a rectangular sketch and constrain to the INTAKE_2
sketch as shown.

Choose Finish Sketch

7-18

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

General Pockets and Pads

Step 4:

Create a general pad for the intake envelope.


Hide the solid body.

Click Pad

Choose General.
Select the Extracted Face (4) as the Placement Face

For the Placement Outline enter a Taper Angle of 3

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-19

General Pockets and Pads

Advance to the Top Face step

Change the Filter to Datum Plane.


Select the Datum Plane as the Top Face.

Advance to the Top Ouline step

Set Curve Rule to Feature Curves.


Select the INTAKE_PAD sketch as the Top Outline.
Enter a Corner Radius of 2.3.

Advance to Target Body

Show and select the solid body as the Target Body.


Choose OK twice to create the pad and exit the dialog.

7-20

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

General Pockets and Pads

Step 5:

Prepare your part to create the general pocket for the intake
opening.
Make layer 1 the work layer, layer 24 Selectable and layers 26
and 81 invisible.
Suppress Feature Set (86) FIN_ARRAY feature.
FIN_ARRAY is a feature set containing all of the features
defining the fins. Suppressing it will make it easier to
select faces for the pocket.
Not all of the features are shown in the image below for
clarity.

Interrogate the two Sketches, INTAKE_1 and INTAKE_2, you


will be using these to create the general pocket.
Step 6:

Create a general pocket for the intake opening.


Click Pocket

Choose General.
Change the Filter to Datum Plane and select the datum plane
as the Placement Face

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-21

General Pockets and Pads

Select the sketch INTAKE_2 as the Placement Outline

Remember which arc you selected first, you will need this
information when you select the Floor Outline.

Select the internal conical face as the Floor Face

Use the Quick Pick to select the internal face of


Cylindrical Pocket (71).

Set the Offset value Of Selected Floor to 0.0.


Select the four arcs of sketch INTAKE_1 for the Floor Outline

.
Make sure the first arc you select corresponds to the first
arc selected for the Placement Outline and the direction
vectors are pointing in the same direction.
The direction can be changed by clicking Reverse.
Set all radius values to 0.
Choose OK twice.
Choose Cancel.
Step 7:
7-22

Unsuppress the FIN_ARRAY feature.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

General Pockets and Pads

Step 8:

Save, but do not close the part.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-23

General Pockets and Pads

Editing General Pads and Pockets


There are three ways to access General Pads and Pockets for editing:

Choose EditFeatureEdit Parameters.

Right-click the feature in the Part Navigator and choose Edit Parameters
or Edit with Rollback..

Since Edit with Rollback is the default, Pads and Pockets can also be
edited by double-clicking the feature in the Part Navigator.
Edit with Rollback works the same as Edit Parameters, except it
makes the feature being edited the Current Feature and suppresses
all the features that follow it (in Timestamp Order).

These options will open the creation dialog and let you edit available
parameters.
A general pocket or pad cannot be edited using the Edit Positioning or
Move Feature options. The locations of these features are determined
by the position of the outline curves.

7-24

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

General Pockets and Pads

Procedure: Editing General Pad and Pockets


1. Choose EditFeatureEdit Parameters and select the feature.
2. Choose the appropriate Selection Step.
3. Edit the desired parameter or defining geometry.
4. Click OK.
Current defining geometry will be highlighted if the geometry is on a
selectable layer. Faces or curves can be replaced by deselecting the
original geometry (using the shift key) and selecting the new geometry.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-25

General Pockets and Pads

Activity: Editing General Pockets and Pads


In this activity, you will edit the general pad and replace the top face.
Step 1:

Continue working with the part ***_general_pocket_3.

7-26

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

General Pockets and Pads

Step 2:

Replace the top face of the general pad.


Make layer 82 selectable and layers 24 and 25 Invisible.
Layer 62 contains the Datum Plane you used as the
Top Face, and the Datum Coordinate System. Layer 82
contains the new surface.
Choose EditFeatureEdit Parameters.
Select the General Pad feature .

Click the Top Face Selection Step

Set the Filter to Datum Plane.


Deselect the highlighted Datum Plane.
Set the Filter to Collector and select the surface on layer 82.
Click OK twice.

7
Note the top face updated but the placement outline
(profile on placement face) also changed. The placement
outline was defined by a taper angle measured relative to
face normals of the top face. The pad taper method and
the pocket placement face will have to be edited.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-27

General Pockets and Pads

Step 3:

Change the taper of the general pad.


Choose EditFeatureEdit Parameters.
Select the General Pad feature.

Click the Placement Outline step

From the Relative To list, choose Change the to Specify New


Vector.
Use the Vector Constructor dialog to specify a vector in the
+XC direction.
Choose OK twice.
Step 4:

Replace the placement face of the general pocket.


If necessary select The Placement Face step

Change the Filter to Datum Plane and deselect the Datum


Plane.
Change the Filter to Collector and select the surface on layer
82.
Click OK twice.

Set layers 62 and 82 to invisible.


Step 5:

7-28

Save and close the part.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

General Pockets and Pads

Summary
General pockets and pads offer greater flexibility in construction and editing,
allowing non-planar placement faces and different placement and floor
outlines.
In this lesson you:

Created a general pocket on a non-planar face.

Created a general pocket having different placement and floor topologies.

Created a general pocket having different placement and floor outlines.

Created and edited a general pad.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

7-29

Lesson

Blending Techniques
Purpose
In this lesson, you will examine blending techniques that may serve special
design circumstances and minimize update failures.
Objective
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

Review the "rolling ball" concept of blending.

Create edge blends.

Create face blends.

Review blending tips and techniques.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-1

Blending Techniques

Edge Blends
Use Edge Blend to round selected edges that are shared by at least two faces.
In practice, edge blending involves a degree of trial and error. The system
attempts to create a blend based on the edges you select, the order of blends
you create, and the values you enter.
On the Feature Operation toolbar, click Edge Blend
or choose InsertDetail FeatureEdge Blend.

See Also: DesignModelingCreating Objects from the Insert


MenuDetail Feature

8-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Below are some tips for Edge Blending:

Make sure the radius of the "rolling ball" can fit into the area you have
chosen to blend.

Create blends as late in the feature tree as possible to minimize the


impact on other features. Since blends are so dependent on size and
orientation of adjacent edges and faces, they tend to fail more often than
other features during updates. Creating them last will reduce the chances
that a later feature will inadvertently reference their edges.

In general, create the largest radius blends first.

Consider design intent and editing flexibility when blending sets of


unrelated, non-contiguous edges. Blending edges in the same operation
results in one feature controlled by the same radius expression. If design
intent changes and requires different radii, the edges would have to be
removed and a new blend created.

If you want to blend a corner which has a mixture of convex and concave
edges, and all three cannot be blended simultaneously, blend the one that
is different first, then, blend the others.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-3

Blending Techniques

If you want to blend one convex and one concave edge at the same
time, you must blend the third edge as well. Or, you can create each
blend separately. You can blend edges 1 and 3 without blending edge
2. However, you cannot blend edges 1 and 2 unless you blend edge 3.
Likewise, you cannot blend edges 2 and 3 without blending edge 1.

Edges 1 & 3 blended,


then edge 2.

all three edges blended at once,


or edge 2 blended, then edges 1 & 3.

Although "three edge" blends are the most common case, you may have
situations where you need to create four, five, and six edge blends. In those
cases, the resulting blend can be created as a single feature whose shape is
determined by the order in which you select the edges.

8-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

The Rolling Ball Principle


Creating blends may be thought of as the process of rolling a spherical ball
along the edge being blended, keeping it in contact with the faces that meet
at the edge. The sphere sweeps out the blend shape.
There are two types of Blends created using the Rolling Ball Principle:

The Fillet blend adds material to the part as it rolls on the inside of two
faces.

The Round blend removes material from the part as it rolls on the outside
of two faces.

Keeping this physical analogy in mind may assist you in visualizing the
needed blend operation.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-5

Blending Techniques

Edge Blend Dialog Box Groups

The Edge to Blend group is for selection of edges (or sets of edges) to blend,
the listing of the selected sets and the desired radii for the blend or set.
Add New Set allows you to specify a new set of edges for the blend.

The Variable Radius Points group is for selection and location of desired
points at which you want to specify a radius. NX will vary the radius of a
blend along its length between the specified radius values at their points.
You must already have specified at least one constant radius edge set
before you can use this option to add variable radius points to it. Variable
radius points are associative.

The Corner Setback group will let you add setback points to a blend
corner, and by adjusting the distance of each setback from the vertex,
apply additional shaping to the corner. You can use setbacks to create, for
example, what is loosely known as a "ball nose blend."

The Stop Short at Corner group lets you stop a blend short of the end of
the selected edge(s). Once you select an end point for a stop short point,
you can specify where on the edge you want the blend to stop. You can
specify that intersecting blends stop at their intersection (At Intersection),
or at a point (At Distance) on a single edge.

The Trim Options group lets you specify a face to cap the end of the blend.
The two choices are Default and Selected Face.

The Overfow Resolutions group allows you to specify how overfows are
handled. Blend overflow occurs when tangent edges of a blend encounter
other edges on the object.

The Settings group allows you to control several things:


How overlapping blends within the feature are handled

Whether or not to Blend All Instances


How to handle Convex/Concave interactions
Whether or not to Remove Self-intersections
Corner Setback options
The Tolerance value

8-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Procedure: Create Constant Radius Edge Blends


1. On the Feature Operation toolbar, click Edge Blend
InsertDetail FeatureEdge Blend.

or choose

2. Specify a value for the radius of the edge blend in the Radius 1 field.
3. If necessary set the Curve Rule list.
4. Select the appropriate edges.
Once you have selected edges to blend
5. Click OK.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-7

Blending Techniques

Activity: Blends on Adjacent Edges


This activity illustrates the principle of applying blends separately and the
significance of the order in which they are created.
Step 1:

Open apd_blend_separate and start the Modeling application, if


it is not already active.

Step 2:

Attempt to blend the edges together.


Click Edge Blend
, or choose InsertDetail
FeatureEdge Blend.
Set the Radius 1 to 9.50.
Set the Curve Rule to Single Curve and select the two edges
shown below.

The Alert message informs you that the intersection or Vertex of


the two edges is too complex to produce a singe edge blend feature
that will provide a smooth transition. It also suggests applying
the two blends separately.

Clear the Alert message.

8-8

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Step 3:

Try applying blends separately.


Shift deselect the longer edge and choose Apply.
Create a second Edge Blend by selecting the longer edge and
choosing Apply.
This blend is probably not what you want.

Delete the two Edge Blends you just created.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-9

Blending Techniques

Step 4:

Create the blends in a different order, use the same radius value
of 9.50.
Click Edge Blend
, or choose InsertDetail
FeatureEdge Blend.
Select the longer edge and choose Apply.
When you apply the blend, the adjacent planar face is
detected as a trim face and extended. The extended
face has two new edges, one elliptical and the other
straight. This straight segment represents a transition
area between the two straight edges.
Blend the straight edge formed by the trim of the first blend
and the original shorter edge.

8-10

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Choose OK.

Although all the blends are the same size, it is necessary


to blend the edge that leaves a large enough intermediate
edge first. The blend on the intermediate edge becomes a
transition segment between two adjacent blends.
If you attempt the same basic approach starting with the
smaller edge, you would discover that the intermediate
edge is not long enough to accommodate the second blend.
You would get an "Unable to apply Blend" message.
Step 5:

Close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-11

Blending Techniques

Activity: Blending Multiple Edges


In this activity, you will create blends on the model by selecting edges in
different orders.
Step 1:

Open apd_blend_rocker and start the Modeling application, if


it is not already active.

8-12

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Step 2:

Blend the lower edges on the front arm.


Click Edge Blend
, or choose InsertDetail
FeatureEdge Blend.
Enter a Radius 1 value of 4.
Set the Curve Rule to Tangent Curves, select the edge shown
below, and click Apply.

Step 3:

Create the blends at the base of the arm.


Using the same settings, select one of the edges at the base of
the right arm and click Apply.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-13

Blending Techniques

Step 4:

Blend all the upper edges except for those on the machined face.
Return to the Trimetric view to select the edges on the upper
side of the arm.
Using the same radius, select the appropriate edges and apply
the blend as shown below.

8-14

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Step 5:

On the other arm, create the blends in the reverse order.


Create blends on the top edges.
Next, blend the bottom edges,
Lastly, blend the edges around the base of the arm.

As you can see, you obtain two different solutions


depending on the order in which you create the blends.
Step 6:

Close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-15

Blending Techniques

Overflow Resolutions and Settings


Blend overflow occurs when tangent edges of a blend encounter other edges
on the solid. Use the following options to control how blend overflows are
handled. You can try combinations of these options to get different results.

When you use more than one overflow resolution option, the system
determines which option to use based on the selections and a hierarchy of
precedence.
There are three check boxes in the Allowed Overflow Resolutions group:
Roll Over Smooth Edges
Roll On Edges (Smooth or Sharp)
Maintain Blend and Move Sharp Edges

8-16

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Roll Over Smooth Edges


Use this option to allow the blend to extend onto a smoothly connected
(tangent) face, should it encounter one.

Roll Over Smooth Edges Selected (left) and Deselected (right)


1. New blend overflowing the edge of another blend.
2. Roll Over Smooth Edges selected, resulting in a shared edge that is
smooth.
3. Roll Over Smooth Edges deselected, resulting in a shared edge that is
sharp

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-17

Blending Techniques

Roll On Edges (Smooth or Sharp)


Use this option to allow the blend to forego tangency with one of the defining
faces, and roll onto any edge, whether smooth or sharp.

Roll Onto Edges (Smooth or Sharp) selected.


1. Encountered edge maintained, tangency foregone.

8-18

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Maintain Blend and Move Sharp Edges


Use this option to allow the blend to maintain tangency with the
defining faces, and move any encountered edges to the blend face.

Blend Maintained Over Sharp Edges (Right)


1. Encountered edges
2. Blend tangency maintained

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-19

Blending Techniques

Explicit Overflow Resolutions


The two options in this group allow you to select specific edges to either Roll
On or prohibit Roll On:
Select Edges to Force Roll on (x)
Select Edges to Prohibit Roll on (x)

8-20

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

The Settings Group


The Overlapping Blends Within Feature allows several options to help resolve
overlapping blends within the feature being created or edited.
Resolution offers three choices:
Maintain Blend and Intersect
If Different Convexivity, Roll Over
Regardless of Convexivity, Roll Over
Blend Order allows you to control which to create first Convex or
Concave blends.
The Blend All Instances check box blends all the instances in an array when
you select one instance to blend.
When using this option, it is best to add the edge blend to the master feature,
and not one of the instanced features. This way, if the array parameters are
later changed, the edge blend will always remain visible in the instance set.
Due to limitations with how an instanced edge is defined, UGS
recommends that you avoid using this option. Instead, first create
the parent feature and the edge blend and add them both to a group
feature. You can create as many instances in the group feature as
needed. See Group Feature and Instance for details.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-21

Blending Techniques

You can use the Special Blend at Convex/Concave Y option when two blends
on adjacent edges of opposite convexity meet at three or more edge vertices
and the default shape of the blend is to roll one blend over the other. A
Y-shaped vertex blend offers an alternate blend shape at the vertex.

1. Special Blend at Convex/Concave Y check box selected.


2. Special Blend at Convex/Concave Y check box cleared.
In some cases the rolling ball blend may be so rigorous in its precision that
it results in a self-intersecting surface that prevents the blend from being
created. If this happens, you can use the Remove Surface Self-Intersections
option to let the system automatically replace those areas with a patch of
blend geometry. The patch area is not a true representation of a blend
produced by a rolling ball, but it is tangent to all of the surfaces to which it
connects. This solution may allow an otherwise self-intersecting blend to be
created, but it also may not be desirable for all manufacturing processes, due
to the possibility of greater production costs.

8-22

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Activity: Blend Overflow Options


In this activity, you will create overflow blends and examine the affect of
the overflow options.
Step 1:

Open apd_blend_rotor and start the Modeling application.


Change the Rendering Style to Shaded with Edges.

Step 2:

Apply blends with the default overflow settings.


Click Edge Blend
, or choose InsertDetail
FeatureEdge Blend.
If necessary expand the Overflow Resolutions and Allowed
Overflow Resolutions groups.
Select all three check boxes.
Apply a 3.8 blend on the top edge of the circular flange and the
upper edge of the tapered midsection.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-23

Blending Techniques

Apply another 3.8 blend at the edge where the midsection and
ring meet at the top of the part.
With the default overflow settings in effect, this blend will be
tangent to the adjacent blend.

Create a19.0 blend to the edge at the bottom of the midsection.

By default, a cliff edge overflow was created where the last


blend meets the holes. The resulting shape of the blend may
not represent what you intended.
Choose Cancel.

8-24

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Step 3:

Edit the overflow condition of the existing blend.


With the cursor over the blend, right click and choose Edit
Parameters.
Clear the Roll On Edges (Smooth or Sharp) check box.
Click OK.

Step 4:

Optional: In the Explicit Overfow Resolutions group, make Select


Edge to Force Roll on (0), and select some of the hole edges in
the flange and notice the effect.

8
Step 5:

Cancel all dialogs and close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-25

Blending Techniques

Activity: Vertices Overflow Option


In this activity, you will create blends with and without the Vertices option so
that you may observe the different results.
Step 1:

Open apd_blend_rocker and start the Modeling application, if


it is not already active.
Change the Rendering Style to Shaded with Edges.

8-26

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Step 2:

Create a blend with the Special Blend at Convex/Concave Y


check box cleared.
Click Edge Blend
, or choose InsertDetail
FeatureEdge Blend.
Set Radius 1 to 4.
If necessary expand the Settings group.
Clear the Special Blend at Convex/Concave Y check box.
Select the 8 edges shown in the image below.

Click Apply.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-27

Blending Techniques

Step 3:

Create a blend with Special Blend at Convex/Concave Y selected.


Select the Special Blend at Convex/Concave Y check box.
Select the 8 edges shown below and click OK.

Rotate the part and observe the 2 different results of the


blending techniques.

8
Step 4:

8-28

Close all parts.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Face Blends
The Face Blend function lets you create a blend tangent to specified sets of
faces, with optional trimming of the blended faces.
From the Feature Operation toolbar:
Click Face Blend

or choose InsertDetail FeatureFace Blend.

See Also: DesignModelingCreating Objects from the Insert


MenuDetail Feature

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-29

Blending Techniques

When To Use Face Blends


A face blend can be created between the faces of solid and/or sheet bodies. The
faces can be nonadjacent or on a different body. The wall faces can be trimmed
automatically to the new blend edges, and can also be attached to the blend.
Since Face Blends are not required to follow edges, they can be successfully
applied in situations where Edge Blends fail, such as in cases where entire
faces are blended away. You will find that in many blending situations, you
may apply either an Edge Blend or a Face Blend. However, Face Blends offer
some unique capabilities that satisfy special modeling conditions.
You should use face blends when:

Existing faces must be blended away.

You have special radius requirements that cannot be achieved with the
constant or variable radius edge blend.

You want to use curves for tangency control.

The faces belong to multiple bodies.

Face Blend lets you control the orientation of the cross-sections using one
of two Types:

Rolling Ball creates a face blend as if it were subtended by a ball rolling in


constant contact with two sets of input faces. The plane of the blend cross
section is defined by the two contact points and the center of the ball.

Swept Section sweeps a cross section along a spine curve. The plane of
the blend cross section is always normal to the spine curve.

8-30

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Face Blend Dialog Box Groups

Face Chains lets you select the first and second sets of faces. If applicable,
you can pick edges instead of faces, and NX infers the two face sets from
those edges. The Curve and Face Rules apply.

Blend Cross Section allows you to specify the Cross Section shape:
Circular or Conic, and the values for radii or offsets.

Constraining and Limiting Geometry allows selection of curves that


control the tangency of the blend, or those that will limit the blend.
Coincident Edges Lets you pass the blend through an edge
instead of remaining tangent to the defining face sets.

Select Tangent Curve lets you control the radius of the sphere
or an offset of the conic by maintaining tangency between the blend
face and the defining face sets, but at a specified curve or edge that
lies within one of the defining face sets. For spherical blends, you
can completely define the radius with a tangent curves string. For
conic blends, the offset opposite the wall containing the tangent curve
string is computed as the smallest offset defined by the tangent curve
string or the constant or variable offset. Curve Rules can be used
for the selection.

Select Middle Tangent Object lets you specify a third set of


faces, to create a 3 face blend. This is only available for Swept
Section Circular blends.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-31

Blending Techniques

Trim and Sew Options allows several choices:


Blend Faces allows four choices for trimming the new blend faces:
Trim to All Input Faces
Trim to Short Input Faces
Trim to Long Input Faces
Do not Trim Blend Faces
It also has two check boxes for trimming and sewing the input faces:
Trim Input Faces to Blend Faces
Sew All Faces. This is only available when Trim Input Faces to
Blend Faces is selected.
Overriding Trim Objects allows selection of faces or planes to limit
and/or cap the blends.

Settings contains five check boxes:


Add Tangent Faces as Encountered lets you select a minimal number
of faces for each face chain. Face Blend then automatically selects
additional tangent faces as needed to continue the blend on the part.
This does not add faces to either Face Chain. Instead it includes the
tangent faces while building the blend.
Orient Cross Section by Isoparameter Lines is only available when
Type is set to Swept Section and is a specialized blend used mostly
for turbine blades.
Terminate at Sharp Edges will stop and cap the blend when it reaches
a sharp edge.

Remove Self Intersections. In cases where the defining face chains


cause the blend to exhibit a self-intersection, this will let Face Blend
automatically replace those areas with a patch. The patch area is not
a true representation of a blend produced by a rolling ball, but it is
tangent to all of the surfaces to which it connects.
Blend Across Sharp Edges propagates face blends across slightly
non-tangent edges. This can be useful when you have slightly sharp
edges that a face blend needs to cross, such as parting edges. When
selected, an additional field is enabled for specifying a maximum
edge Angle.
8-32

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Face Blend Attachment Methods


Use these options to specify how you want NX to trim and/or sew the blend
into the part.
There are two basic options Trim Input Faces to Blend Faces and Sew All
Faces.
The Sew All Faces option is not available unless the Trim Input Faces to
Blend Faces is checked on.
The additional Blend Faces options will be determined by which basic trim
option you have checked on.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-33

Blending Techniques

Activity: Face Blending


In this activity, you will create a face blend on a part and use the Examine
Geometry options to determine an allowable radius.
Step 1:

Open apd_face_blend_1 and start the Modeling application, if


it is not already active.

Step 2:

Interrogate the part.


Open the Part Navigator and cycle through the features.

Step 3:

Apply a face blend between the boss feature and solid body.
Click Face Blend
Blend.

, or choose InsertDetail FeatureFace

Set Face Rule to Tangent Faces and Curve Rule to Tangent


Curves.
If it is not already set, from the Type list, select Rolling Ball.

In the Settings group, Select the Add Tangent Faces As


Encountered check box.
In the Blend Cross Section group, from the Shape list, select
Circular.
Set the Radius to a Constant 6.35.
In the Trim and Sew Options group, from the Blend Faces list,
select Trim to All Input Faces.
8-34

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Select the Trim Input Faces to Blend Faces and the Sew All
Faces check boxes.
For the Face Chain 1 select the conical face of the Boss.

Make sure the direction arrow points away from the Boss. If
not, click Flip Direction

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-35

Blending Techniques

Advance to the Face Chain 2 selection step.


Select the vertical face of the pad adjacent to the boss shown
below.

Make sure the direction arrow points away from the body. Click
Flip Direction if necessary

Click OK.

Step 4:
8-36

Create an Edge Blend on the Top edge of the boss.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Click Edge Blend

Set the Curve Rule to Vertex Tangent Edge.


In the Allowed Overflow Resolutions group, Clear the Roll
On Edges (Smooth or Sharp) and the Special Blend At
Convex/Concave Y, check boxes.
Key in 4.8 for the Radius 1 value.
Select the top edge of the Boss.
Notice the Alert message, and the highlighted faces.

Click OK.

Shade the model and examine the completed blend. Although


technically there does not appear to be anything wrong with
the current blend this is not the desired visual result.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-37

Blending Techniques

Step 5:

Reopen apd_face_blend_1.

Step 6:

Apply the edge blend to the top edge of the boss.


Click Edge Blend

Key in 4.8 for the Radius 1 value.


Set the Curve Rule to Face Edges.
Use the same Overflow Options from Step 4.
Select the top face of the Boss.
Click OK.
Step 7:

Create the Face Blend again.


Click Face Blend

Use the same parameter inputs used in Step 2.


For the Face Chain 1 select the conical face of the Boss.
Use Flip Direction if necessary so the direction arrow points
away from the boss.
Advance to the Face Chain 2 selection step.

8-38

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Select the vertical face of the pad adjacent to the boss shown
below. If necessary use Flip Direction.
Note the Alert message and the highlighted faces.
Click OK.

Step 8:

Close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-39

Blending Techniques

Activity: Face Blending and Tangency Control


In this activity, you will create a face blend using tangency control to avoid
the areas around holes.
Step 1:

Open apd_blend_rotor and start the Modeling application, if it is


n ot already active.

8-40

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Step 2:

Create four associative offset curves from the upper edges of the
holes.
On the Curve toolbar, click Offset Curve
InsertCurve from CurvesOffset.

or choose

Set the Curve Rule to Single Curve.


Choose one of the four top hole edges from Circular Array (6).
Make sure the arrow is pointing away from the center of the
hole.
Key in 6.35 for the Distance.
In the Settings group, make sure the Associative check box
is selected.
Choose Apply.
Create Offset Curves at the three other holes.
Since the edges of the hole are not contiguous, four separate
offset operations must be performed.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-41

Blending Techniques

Step 3:

Create a face blend using the offset curves for tangency control.
Click Face Blend

Select the top planar face of the flange for Face Chain 1.
Make sure the direction arrow is pointing upward. Use
Reverse Direction if needed.
Advance to the Face Chain 2 selection step.
Select the conical face of the boss. If necessary Reverse
Direction so the direction arrow points away from the boss.
In the Constraining and Limiting Geometry group, make
Select Tangent Curve (0) active

Select the four Offset curves.


In the Trim and Sew group, make sure the Trim Input Faces to
Blend Faces and Sew All Faces check boxes are selected.
Use a Constant 12.7 Radius with a Circular Cross Section.
Click OK.

Step 4:

8-42

Close all parts.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Activity: Redefining Blended Edges


In this activity, you will associate a blend with different part edges.
Step 1:

Open apd_blend_edit and start the Modeling application, if it is


not already active.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-43

Blending Techniques

Step 2:

Redefine the edges associated with the blend.


Choose EditFeatureEdit Parameters.
Highlight Edge Blend(6) in the list, then click OK.
Set the Curve Rule to Single Curve.
Deselect the three originals edges labeled 1.
Select the two new edges labeled 2.

Click OK twice.
Step 3:

Close all parts.

8-44

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Blending Techniques

Summary
In this lesson you:

Reviewed the "rolling ball" concept of blending.

Created Edge Blends.

Created Face Blends.

Identified general blending tips and techniques.

Applied overflow options.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

8-45

Lesson

Introduction to the NX
Spreadsheet

Purpose
The NX Spreadsheet provides an intelligent interface between the Microsoft
Excel or Xess applications and NX. The natural, table-driven interface and its
built-in functions facilitate associative parametric design.
Objective
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

Identify and distinguish the different spreadsheets available with NX.

Extract and organize expressions in a spreadsheet.

Update a part with parameter values defined in the spreadsheet.

Apply a built-in function to determine the mass properties of a part.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

9-1

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

NX Spreadsheet
There are several variations of spreadsheets provided with NX. Each one
provides slightly different capabilities and relationship with the part.

Gateway Spreadsheet

Edit Expression Spreadsheet

Modeling Spreadsheet

The NX Spreadsheet can interface with either the Xess (all platforms) or
Microsoft Excel (Windows only) applications. On Windows platforms, the
default spreadsheet may be set by choosing PreferencesSpreadsheet from
the main menu bar.
For Windows platforms you will need to obtain an Exceed license to run Xess.

You can set the Session default Spreadsheet under FileUtilitiesCustomer


DefaultsGatewayGeneral.
If there is already a spreadsheet saved in a part, then that spreadsheet will
be opened with the application that created it, regardless of the default
setting. The FileUtilitiesMigrate Spreadsheet Data option can be used to
move data from Xess to Excel or vice versa.
See Also: GatewayCustomer DefaultsSpreadsheet

9-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Gateway Spreadsheet
The Gateway Spreadsheet is accessed by choosing ToolsSpreadsheet when
a part is loaded and you are in the Gateway application.
NX will start a copy of Xess, or Microsoft Excel on Windows, and make
connections to it automatically. Messages on the status line inform you of the
progress made toward connecting with the spreadsheet. If there is a copy of
the spreadsheet already running on your display that can accept connections,
then NX uses that copy without invoking another instance of the spreadsheet.
This spreadsheet is saved with an NX part and can be used to store relevant
non-geometric data.
This spreadsheet is associated with a part and contains additional options
in the Tools pull-down menu to save the associated part. However, it cannot
be used to edit or update a model.
See Also: Getting StartedWorking with PartsCommon
ToolsSpreadsheet

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

9-3

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Edit Expressions Spreadsheet


Clicking Spreadsheet Edit in the Expressions dialog box will open a
spreadsheet associated with expressions. All expressions in the part are
automatically extracted into a spreadsheet containing columns for the
expression name, formula, and value.
Choose ToolsExpressions and click Spreadsheet Edit
Name
Circular_thk
Diametral_pitch
Face_width

Formula
=(pi()/2)/Diametrial_pitch
=No_of_teeth/Pitch_dia
1

Value
.0336599
4.666667
1

28

28

No_of_teeth

You may need to change the protection properties on the spreadsheet to


edit fields other then the Formula field.
Choose ToolsProtectionUnprotect Sheet.
In the spreadsheet, you are allowed to modify expressions with simple
formulas by changing the contents of the column labeled Formula.
With the Edit Expression Spreadsheet, you can:

Change values or formulas in the column labeled Formula.

Reference interpart expressions already recognized in the current


expression list.

Use spreadsheet native formulas as a part of the NX expression.

Reference spreadsheet cells as part of the NX expression.

With the Edit Expression Spreadsheet you may not:

Create or reference new interpart expression names.

Change the value of interpart expressions.

9-4

Add or delete expressions from the list

Modify the expression names.

Edit formulas with measurements or special functions

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

If changes are made to the expressions in the spreadsheet, they may be


applied to the model by choosing ToolsUpdate Expr from the spreadsheet
menu options. The expression will update, but the Edit Expression dialog will
not visibly change until the spreadsheet is either disconnected from or exited.
The model can be updated by choosing Apply in the Expression Editor.
If there are any interpart expressions, they will be located at the bottom of
the list and their cells will be yellow and cannot be changed. If you attempt to
change these cells, an error message will inform you that they are protected.
To exit the spreadsheet choose FileClose and Return to Expression.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

9-5

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Modeling Spreadsheet
The Modeling Spreadsheet is the most powerful of the NX spreadsheets.
This spreadsheet allows you to extract data from a part, modify the part,
and update part geometry without exiting the spreadsheet. Its capabilities
include expression editing, goal seek, general documentation, and defining
part variations. This spreadsheet offers several additional pull-down menu
options that allow you to exchange information with the model.
To access the Modeling Spreadsheet choose ToolsSpreadsheet .
See Also: Getting StartedWorking with PartsCommon
ToolsSpreadsheet
Common characteristics of the Modeling Spreadsheet:

Accessed from all applications except Gateway.

Stored internally with a part but can also be saved externally using
Save As.

Extracts data from a part and modifies part data.

Update a model.

Optimize a model based on design criteria.

9-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Spreadsheet NX Preferences
The Modeling Spreadsheet provides several preferences that are specific to
NX. These may be accessed by choosing OptionsNX Preferences from the
active spreadsheet menu bar.
There are four check boxes in the Preferences dialog box.
Vertical Orientation (selected by standard default)
Auto Refresh on Load (cleared by standard default)
Use Fixed Update Range (selected by standard default)
Auto Fit on Update (cleared by standard default)
Vertical Orientation dictates whether extracted expressions are presented in
columns or rows. When selected, expression names are placed in a vertical
column with the expression values to the right of the names. When cleared,
the expression names are placed horizontally with the expression values
below the names.
Auto Refresh on Load causes the automatic update of the values for
all expression names that are in the Active Expression Range when the
spreadsheet is loaded.
Use Fixed Update Range is used to enable or disable cursor sensitivity as
it relates to updating the part. When selected, the cursor is ignored during
update.
Auto Fit on Update is used to enable or disable graphics fit operations after
the update occurs using ToolsUpdate NX Part.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

9-7

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Extracting Expressions and Updating the NX Part


The Tools pull-down menu in the Modeling Spreadsheet contains the
following options that apply to exchanging expressions between the
spreadsheet and the part.

UpdateNX Part - Updates the part with the NX data included in the
Active Range.

Extract Expr - Imports ALL of the part expressions names and values in
the active part into the spreadsheet. The cell cursor defines the beginning
cell location according to the orientation (column or row) determined by
the Preferences setting.

Refresh Expr - Updates the spreadsheet with existing expression data


that was edited in the NX part.

Save Part - Same as FileSave in NX but you do not have to exit the
spreadsheet.

Save Part As - Same as FileSave As in NX but you do not have to exit


the spreadsheet.

9-8

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Active Expression Range


The Active Expression Range is a named range of cells in the spreadsheet
that defines the area that contains the active block of NX expression data.
It includes both the expression names and the corresponding formulas (or
values). The cells in the first column (vertical orientation) or row (horizontal
orientation) contain the expression names. The cells immediately to the right
(or below) contain the corresponding values or formulas.
When you update the part, the Active Expression Range determines what
data is sent back to NX.
A
1
2
3
4
5
6

Parameters
Circular_thk
Diametrial_pitch
Face_width
No_of_teeth
_p1

B
0.36
4.2
1
32
7.9

There are two ways that the Active Expression Range can be defined:

If you extract expressions by choosing ToolsExtract Expr, the active


range is automatically defined.

If you input the expressions manually or modify the list of extracted


expressions, you must explicitly set the active range by selecting
(highlighting) the cells that contain the expression names and values (or
formulas) and choosing EditDefine Expr Rng.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

9-9

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Saving Spreadsheet Data and Returning to NX


When a spreadsheet is invoked, control of the NX session is handed over to
the spreadsheet and all other functions are suspended. The NX main menu
bar is disabled until the spreadsheet is exited or disconnected.
Although the spreadsheet is stored internally with a part, you must save the
spreadsheet data to include it with the part. You can save the spreadsheet
data before exiting by choosing FileUpdate from the spreadsheet menu bar.
This saves the new spreadsheet data within the loaded part. This data is not
saved on disk until the part is also saved.
Saving the part using ToolsSave Part in the spreadsheet will save
the NX part but not any new spreadsheet information. It will save the
part with the data that was in the spreadsheet when the spreadsheet
was last saved.
There are two ways to return control to NX in a session.

In Excel, choose FileExit to close the spreadsheet.

In Xess, choose FileClose and Return to Modeling.

Once you attempt to exit the spreadsheet you will be asked if you want to
Save the spreadsheet (OK), Cancel the request or Discard the spreadsheet
and all changes made.

9-10

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Workflow: Using the Modeling Spreadsheet


The basic steps to use the Modeling Spreadsheet to manage expressions are
as follows:

Build a parametric model.

In the Modeling application, invoke the spreadsheet.

Choose ToolsExtract Expr (or manually enter the expressions and


values).

Organize the expression data by moving cells and clearing the cells that
contain expressions that are not needed.

Choose EditDefine Expr Rng to set the active range.

Establish proper spreadsheet protection, choose ToolsProtection.

Perform any design optimization and/or analysis to modify the


expressions.

Choose ToolsUpdate NX Part to update the model with the modified


expression data.

Save both the spreadsheet and the part.

These are general steps to incorporate spreadsheets into a design process.


Company specific standards and procedures should be implemented to
maximize the benefits of spreadsheets and facilitate the exchange of data.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

9-11

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Activity: Timing Gear Spreadsheet (Excel)


In this activity, you will create a Excel spreadsheet to control the expressions
and formulas in an existing model. If you are not running Windows, this
activity is also in the Appendix, Introduction to the NX SpreadsheetXess
Activities.
Step 1:

Open apd_timing_gear, and save it as ***_timing_gear.

The design intent for this part dictates that the gear be driven by
the following parameters:
Number of Teeth
Pitch Diameter
Face Width
The following additional parameters are calculated:
Diametral Pitch
Tooth Thickness
Outside Diameter

Base Diameter

9-12

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Step 2:

Examine and modify the part.


Start the Modeling application, if it is not already active.
Using the Part Navigator review the features used to construct
the part.
Examine the expressions in the Expressions dialog box.
Edit the following expressions and update the part.
No_of_teeth = 32
Pitch_dia = 190.5

Step 3:

Activate the Modeling Spreadsheet and extract expressions.


Choose PreferencesSpreadsheet and make sure the Default
Spreadsheet Application is set to Excel.
Choose ToolsSpreadsheet.
From the spreadsheet menu bar. choose OptionsNX
Preferences
If not already set, select the Vertical Orientation and Use
Fixed Update Range check boxes, and make sure all others
are cleared.
Highlight cell A1.
Choose ToolsExtract Expr.
This will extract all of the expressions from the part and
add them to the spreadsheet. The expression names will be
placed in column A and titled Parameters and the expression
values are placed in column B.
Adjust the widths of the two columns for a better view of
the contents.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

9-13

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Step 4:

Clear unwanted expressions.


Only the expressions with user-defined names will be evaluated
in the spreadsheet.
Remove all of the _p# expressions by highlighting the cells
that contain them, and choose EditClearAll. Then Cut and
Paste the pitch dia and root dia Parameter and values from
rows 51 and 52 to rows 10 and 11.
Your spreadsheet should resemble the chart below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Step 5:

A
Parameters
array_angle
array_no
circular_thk
diametrial_pitch
face_width
instance_hole_dia
no_of_teeth
outside_dia
pitch_dia
root_dia

B
60
6
9.351146883
0.167979003
20
30
32
202.40625
190.5
176.7244688

Add a header for the Expressions column.


Select cell B1 and type Expressions.
Make the text in cell B1 bold and italicized for easier
identification.

9-14

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Step 6:

Group the critical Expressions together so you can define an


Expression Range.
Use Cut and Paste to rearrange the Expressions in the
following order. Also, Clear all cells not shown below.
You can also drag entire rows up or down the spreadsheet.
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Step 7:

B
Expressions

Parameters
no_of_teeth
pitch_dia
face_width

32
190.5
20

circular_thk
diametrial_pitch
outside_dia
root_dia

9.351146883
0.167979003
202.40625
176.7244688

Test the spreadsheet.


Change the following values in the Expressions column:
No_of_teeth = 28
Pitch_dia = 152.4
Face_width = 30

Step 8:

Define the Expression Range and update the part.


To restrict an update to a specific set of expressions,
an Active Expression Range can be defined. Only the
expressions in these cells are used to update the part from
the spreadsheet.
Select cells A2 through B4.
Choose EditDefine Expr Rng.
The message confirming that you have set the range
should appear in the lower left portion of the spreadsheet
window.
From the menu bar, choose ToolsUpdate NX Part.
The spreadsheet will send the new expression information to
the part and update the model with the new values.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

9-15

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Step 9:

Exit the spreadsheet and verify the Expression change.


From the spreadsheet menu bar, choose FileClose & Return
to Modeling.
Choose OK when prompted as to whether or not to save the
current spreadsheet data.
Notice the holes in the web are gone. Their status is
controlled by an expression that is based on the Pitch
Diameter. If the Pitch Diameter is less than 180, the holes
are suppressed.
Choose ToolsExpression and verify the changes made from
the spreadsheet.

Step 10: Save but do not close your part.

9-16

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Built-in Spreadsheet Functions


In addition to being an expression editor, the spreadsheet can also be used to
perform functions based on a single or a series of mathematical equations.
If the analysis can be defined by equations it can be performed inside the
spreadsheet.
A typical generic built-in function would be =SUM(c1,c2). This function adds
the values of the specified cells, c1 and c2. You would find this sort of function
in virtually any spreadsheet.
As more information is added, it is beneficial to develop standards for
the format and styling so that users of the spreadsheets throughout
your company will see a consistent interface. These standards could
address cell locations for input areas and formulas, cell colors, and
header naming conventions.
In addition to the normal built-in functions, the spreadsheet adds functions
that integrate the spreadsheet with NX.
An example of an NX built-in spreadsheet function would be =UGEXPR("p1").
This function fetches the value of an expression with the specified name.
The built-in functions provided by NX in the spreadsheet allow you to relate
spreadsheet calculations directly to objects or other part information, as well
as perform specialized mathematical functions.
Functions in the Excel spreadsheet application do not require an "@"
character preceding the name.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

9-17

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Mass Properties Function


One of the most useful built-in spreadsheet functions extracts the mass
properties of a solid from a part, MASS3D. This function can be utilized
to determine the weight or volume of a part in order to perform a design
optimization.
=MASS3D("object_name", type, units)
Returns mass properties for a named sheet or body, or all sheets or solids
in a part or assembly component. Single returned values are placed in the
cell. Multiple values are returned in sets of 3 columns. When all properties
(type=0) are returned, each property is placed in consecutive rows of the
spreadsheet. Multiple values for a property are placed in adjacent columns.
Values for object_name are:
object name string
component part name
PART
SOLIDS
SHEETS

extracts mass properties of a single


solid of sheet with the given name
extracts mass properties of all solids
and sheets in the component part
extracts mass properties for all solids
and sheets in the part
extracts mass properties for all solids
in the part
extracts mass properties for all
sheets in the part

9-18

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Values for the type field are:


Type

# of Values

Description

0
1

42
1

3
4

1
3

First Moments, WCS Axes and


Origin

Moments of Inertia with respect


to (w.r.t.) WCS Axes and Origin

Moments of Inertia w.r.t. CofM


Origin/WCS Axes

Spherical Moment of Inertia


w.r.t. CofM Origin/WCS Axes

Inertia Products w.r.t. WCS


Axes and Origin

10

Inertia Products w.r.t. CofM


Origin/WCS Axes

11
12

3x3=9
3

13

14

15

16

Principal Axes, WCS


Principal Moments w.r.t. CofM
Origin
Radii Of Gyration w.r.t. WCS
Axes and Origin
Radii Of Gyration w.r.t. CofM
Origin/WCS Axes
Spherical Radius of Gyration
w.r.t. CofM Origin/WCS Axes
Density

All properties
Area
Volume
Mass
Center of Mass (CofM), WCS

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

9-19

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Values for units are:


1

pounds & inches


pounds & feet

2
3
4

grams & centimeters


kilograms & meters

The MASS3D built-in function is only one of many that have been
included to facilitate the exchange of information between NX and the
spreadsheet. See the appendices for a list of additional built-in functions.
For a complete description of the functions, refer to on-line help.

Examples
=MASS3D("bracket", 2, 1 )
This will calculate the volume of a solid or sheet object named bracket and
return the result in cubic inches. If the work part is an assembly, this will
calculate the mass of all objects in the component part named bracket.
=MASS3D("solids", 3, 4 )
This will calculate the mass of all solid bodies in the work part and return the
result in kilograms. If the work part is an assembly, this will calculate the
mass of all loaded solid bodies in the component parts.
In Excel, when applying a function in which the output produces
multiple fields, you must first select all of the cells that the function will
fill, type in the function, and then hit Ctrl-Shift-Enter.

9-20

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Activity: Mass Properties in a Spreadsheet (Excel)


In this activity, you will use the mass properties function in the spreadsheet
to obtain the weight of a solid. If you are not running Windows, this activity
is also in the Appendix, Introduction to the NX SpreadsheetXess Activities
Step 1:

Continue using the part ***_timing_gear in the Modeling


application.

Step 2:

Assign a name to the gear solid so the spreadsheet will be able to


identify the solid to use in the analysis.
Choose EditProperties.
Select the solid body from the graphics area and click OK.
Make sure you select the solid body and not the feature.
On the General page, enter gear for the name and click OK.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

9-21

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Step 3:

Assign a density to the solid.


Choose EditFeatureSolid Density.
In the Units list, select Grams - Centimeters.
Enter a Solid Density of 7.249 and press Enter.
Select the solid body and choose OK.
A density may also be assigned to a solid by assigning a
material to it.
Choose ToolsMaterial Properties.
At the bottom of the dialog box, click Library.
In the Search Criteria dialog, make sure the Category
list is set to Metals and choose OK.
Select a material from the list of metals and click OK.
With the Materials dialog box active, select the solid and
click OK.
These material properties are also used by the Structures
and Motion applications

Step 4:

Add a mass properties function to the spreadsheet.


Choose ToolsSpreadsheet.
In cell B12 enter the title Timing Gear Mass.
In cell B13 enter =mass3d("gear",3,1) and press Enter.

9-22

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Step 5:

Change the width of the gear.


Change the expression Face_width to 32 in the spreadsheet.
Choose ToolsUpdate NX Part and note the change to the
value of the mass.
A
1
2
3
4

Parameters
No_of_teeth
Pitch_dia
Face_width

12
13

B
Expressions
28
152.4
32
Timing Gear Mass
5.770377309

Step 6:

Close and save the spreadsheet and Return to Modeling.

Step 7:

Save your part.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

9-23

Introduction to the NX Spreadsheet

Summary
The NX Spreadsheet offers a natural table driven interface to facilitate
design and analysis.
In this lesson you:

Identified the different spreadsheets available with NX.

Extracted and organized expressions in a spreadsheet.

Modified expressions and updated a part from a spreadsheet.

Applied a built-in function to determine the mass of a part.

9-24

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Lesson

10 Design Optimization
Purpose
Besides serving as an interface to edit expressions and enter complex
formulas, the spreadsheet can be utilized to implement optimization tools into
your design process. These tools will automatically vary specified parameters
and update the part until a desired result is achieved.
Objective
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

Apply the Goal Analysis tool to help identify an acceptable range of values
for the Goal Seek.

Apply the Goal Seek tool to optimize a design.

10
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

10-1

Design Optimization

Goal Seek
The Goal Seek function is a means by which you can vary the value of one
variable in order to achieve a desired result in another variable, using an
iterative technique.
Performing a Goal Seek requires that you define a Variable Cell, Target Cell,
Target Value, Tolerance, and Max Iterations. With this information, the
system will go through the following process:

Make a guess for the initial variable value.

Perform a spreadsheet recalculation.

Update the part with the expressions in the active range.

Perform another spreadsheet recalculation.

Compare the target cell to the target value.

Repeat the process if the target cell and target value are not within the
tolerance.

The specific mathematical calculations performed are based on the type of


Goal Seek that is being used. The "guesses" for each iteration are made
according to that calculation.
The Goal Seek dialog contains a toggle to Perform NX Updates that
control whether the part is actually updated during each iteration.
If the target parameters are calculated strictly from formulas in the
spreadsheet, this option can be toggled off to improve performance.
If the target parameters are dependent on the part geometry or
data in the part (i.e. mass, volume, distance), then this should be
toggled on so that new values will be calculated for each iteration.
See Also: GatewayGatewayGateway menu & Dialog
ReferenceToolsSpreadsheetModeling Spreadsheet

10
10-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Design Optimization

Goal Seek Methods


There are several methods that can be used to perform a goal seek. Each
method uses a different set of mathematical calculations to obtain the desired
result. The method can be set by choosing OptionsSetup Goal Seek from
the spreadsheet menu bar.
The methods that are available:
Regula Falsi Method
Newton-Raphson
Newton-Raphson 2D
Nonlinear Sidel 2D
Optimize 1xN
Once the method is established, the Goal Seek may be performed by choosing
ToolsGoal Seek. The Goal Seek dialogs vary for each method and are
described in the following pages.
The proper selection of either an initial guess or upper and lower brackets will
assist the goal seek process in converging on a solution and reduce the number
of iterations required. It is still possible that there will be no convergence to a
solution so it is important to identify a maximum number of iterations.
Regula-Falsi
Regula-Falsi is also known as False Position or Bracket goal seek. It works
by finding two limits for the variable value that result in outputs that are
above and below the target value (bracketing). The program then tightens
the upper and lower limits until the solution is found within the tolerance.
Variable Cell must have contents, but cannot contain a formula.
Target Cell must contain a formula.
Target Value is the desired result of the formula in the Target Cell.
Upper Bracket and Lower Bracket values are optional. If you do not enter a
value, the program will assign the current value of the Variable Cell as the
lower limit and the upper bracket will be that value plus a small offset.
Tolerance is the desired accuracy of convergence.
Max Iterations limits the number of tries that the system will make in trying
to obtain a solution.
Perform NX Update tells the system whether or not to update the part. This
option should be on if you are changing values that control the model.
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

10-3

10

Design Optimization

Newton-Raphson
The standard Newton-Raphson method starts with an initial guess for the
solution, then calculates the derivative (slope) of the function at that guess.
The derivative slope is used to get a new guess for the solution function.
Mathematically speaking, the program calculates the derivative by taking
a small step away from the given point, and then dividing the difference
between the two function values by the step size.
derivative = (f(p0)-f(p1))/(p0-p1)
where:f() = function
p0 = initial guess
p1 = initial guess + small delta
Variable Cell must have contents, but cannot contain a formula.
Start Point tells the system at what value to begin its search. This field is
optional, and if left blank the current value of the Variable Cell will be used.
Target Cell must contain a formula.
Target Value is the desired result.
Tolerance is the desired accuracy of convergence.
Max Iterations limits the number of tries that the system will make in trying
to obtain a solution.
Perform NX Update tells the system whether or not to update the part. This
option should be on if you are changing values that control the model.
Zero Slope Function allows the system to handle functions that have a zero
slope and converge on an accurate solution.
An example of a zero slope might be a case where the result of a function is a
percentage value, and once the percentage gets to 100% it stops increasing.
The slope of the curve when the function is clamped to 100% is zero. For
example consider the following function:
if (x<10) x*x else 100
This function returns x squared until the value is 10 and then it is 100
regardless of the input. Using normal Newton-Raphson goal seek with a
target value of 100, the program may make a guess of 12.4 for x. The function
is evaluated, the result is 100, and since the target has been achieved the goal
seek stops. Even though a value of 12.4 for x does match the target, it is not
really the value we want. By turning on the Zero Slope Function option, the
goal seek finds the value of 10 as the value for x.
The Zero Slope Function does take more computational effort, and additional
iterations to achieve the solution but will yield correct results when dealing
with a slope of zero.

10
10-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Design Optimization

Newton-Raphson 2D
Newton-Raphson 2D goal seek is a variation of Newton-Raphson designed to
find solutions to cases with two equations and two unknowns.
Variable Cell 1 is the cell location to change. The cell must have contents,
but cannot contain a formula.
Start Point 1 is an initial guess for Variable Cell 1. This field is optional, and
if left blank the current value of Variable Cell 1 is used.
Target Cell 1 must contain a formula.
Target Value 1 is the desired result for the formula in Target Cell 1.
Variable Cell 2 is the second cell to change.
Start Point 2 is the optional initial guess for Variable Cell 2. If left blank, the
current value of the Variable Cell 2 is used.
Target Cell 2 is the cell location of a second formula.
Target Value 2 is for the desired result for the formula in Target Cell 2.
Tolerance is the desired accuracy of convergence.
Max Iterations limits the number of tries that the system will make in trying
to obtain a solution.
Perform NX Update tells the system whether or not to update the part. This
option should be on if you are changing values that control the model.
The initial start points may be left blank. If so, the current values of the
variable cells will be used for initial guesses.

10
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

10-5

Design Optimization

Non-linear 2D Sidel Iteration


Non-linear 2D Sidel Iteration is a more specialized 2D solver. It is designed to
handle the following type situations:
Given:

f(x,y)=p1 and g(x,y)=p2

Solve such that

p1=x (of f(x,y)=x)

and

p2 = y (or g(x,y)=y)

You can think of this function as making the variable cells equal to the
corresponding target values.
Variable Cell 1 is a cell location to change. The cell must have contents, but
cannot contain a formula.
Start Point 1 is the initial guess for Variable Cell 1. This field is optional, and
if left blank the current value of Variable Cell 1 is used.
Target Cell 1 must contain a formula.
Variable Cell 2 is a second cell to change.
Start Point 2 is the optional initial guess for Variable Cell 2. If left blank, the
current value of Variable Cell 2 is used.
Target Cell 2 is the cell that contains a second formula.
Tolerance is the desired accuracy of convergence.
Max Iterations limits the number of tries that the system will make in trying
to obtain a solution.
Perform NX Update tells the system whether or not to update the part. This
option should be on if you are changing values that control the model.
The initial start points may once again be left blank, and as before the current
value of the associated variable cell will be used as the initial guess.

10
10-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Design Optimization

Optimize 1xN
Optimize 1xN lets you solve problems using multiple variables to control
one objective or target function as the output. An example might be where
several size and thickness parameters are variables, with strength or weight
being the output objective function. You can use Optimize 1xN goal seek
to determine values for the input parameters that fit within your defined
constraints in order to maximize the strength, or even minimize the weight.
Num. Variables The number of input variable, up to ten.
Variable Cell(s)The input variable cells. Input of multiple cells is done by
using a comma between each cell identifier.
Start Point(s) tells the system at what value to begin its search. This field
is optional, and if left blank the current value of the Variable Cell will be
used. Optimize 1xN generally requires a decent start point for the function
to converge.
Min Bound(s) identifies the lower limit(s).
Max Bound(s) identifies the upper limit(s).
Target Cell is where the result will be placed.
Tolerance is the desired accuracy of convergence.
Max Iterations limits the number of tries that the system will make in trying
to obtain a solution.
Perform NX Update tells the system whether or not to update the part. This
option should be on if you are changing values that control the model.
Trace Function - On UNIX platforms, if you select the Trace Function
checkbox, the system prints additional information to the terminal window.
On Windows platforms, selecting the Trace Function checkbox has no effect.

10
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

10-7

Design Optimization

Goal Analysis
Before beginning a Goal Seek operation, it may be helpful to perform a Goal
Analysis. Goal Analysis will generate a graph and table of the variable cell
values versus the target cell values at incremental steps within a specific
range. The graph and table can be used to determine an initial guess or
bracket values for a goal seek operation.
This option can be accessed by choosing ToolsGoal Analysis from the
Spreadsheet main menu.
The dialog box provides the following fields:

Variable Cell

Cell to change

Target Cell
Lower Bracket

Output value to graph


Lower range limit for the graph

Upper Bracket

Upper range limit for the graph

Number of steps
Results Cell

Resolution of the graph


Where to put the results

There is also a check box for Perform NX Update.


All of the fields must be completed to perform a Goal Analysis.
The variable cell is initialized with the lower bracket value, and then
increased (or decreased) to the upper bracket value in the specified number of
steps. The results cell should be set to an open area on the spreadsheet so
that intermediate values can be saved for graphical output. The intermediate
results use two columns and "Number of Steps" rows to save the data. Upon
completion, the variable cell is set to its original value.

10
10-8

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Design Optimization

The line graph table results of a sample Goal Analysis are shown below.

From the graph, you can determine appropriate upper and lower brackets
and reduce the number of iterations required during the Goal Seek operation.

10
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

10-9

Design Optimization

Activity: Optimizing a Part for Volume


In this activity, you will apply the Goal Seek function in a spreadsheet to vary
a parameter of a solid until a desired volume is reached.
Step 1:

Open apd_optimize_1 and save it as ***_optimize_1.


The part currently contains an extracted, simplified solid on layer 2
representing the internal volume. (The original solid is on layer 1.)
The design intent requires that the volume of the reservoir be at
1 liter. The Length parameter (indicated below) will be modified
to attain this desired volume.

10
10-10

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Design Optimization

Step 2:

Name the simplified solid representing the volume.


The simplified solid will be used in the spreadsheet analysis and
must be named for the spreadsheet to recognize it.
Start the Modeling application, if it is not already active.
Choose EditProperties.
Select the solid body and click OK.
You may need to use QuickPick to be able to select the
solid body instead of the feature.
On the General page of the Solid Body Properties dialog box,
key in volume for the Name and click OK.

Step 3:

Set the Spreadsheet preferences.


Choose PreferencesSpreadsheet.
If necessary set the Default Application to Excel.
If you were working on a Unix workstation your
preference would be set to Xess.
Exit the dialog.

Step 4:

Invoke the Modeling Spreadsheet and extract expressions.


Choose ToolsSpreadsheet.
Choose OptionsNX Preferences from the spreadsheet menu
bar.
Make sure the Vertical Orientation and Use Fixed Update
Range check boxes are both selected, and all others are cleared,
and click OK.
Highlight cell A1.
Choose ToolsExtract Expr.
Clear all of the cells containing expressions, except for Length
and Width.
A
1
2
3

Parameters
Length
Width

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

B
144
136

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

10
10-11

Design Optimization

Step 5:

Add a mass properties function to calculate volume.


In cell B5 enter Volume.
In cell B6 enter =mass3d("volume",2,3), for Xess enter
@mass3d("volume",2,3).
A
1
2
3

Parameters
Length
Width

5
6

144
136
Volume
878.8681

If the volume does not appear as a numerical value, edit the


Format Cells and change it to General.

10
10-12

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Design Optimization

Step 6:

Perform a Goal Analysis to determine approximate range for the


Length.
Choose ToolsGoal Analysis.
To obtain the desired volume of 1.0 liters, it is estimated the
Length will probably be between 144 and 160. These values
will be used as the bracket values in the Goal Analysis.
Enter the following settings:
Variable Cell = B2
Target Cell = B6
Lower Bracket = 144
Upper Bracket = 160
Number of Steps = 5
Results Cell = B8
Make sure the Perform NX Update check box is selected.
Click OK.
The analysis reveals that the required length will be close to
159. A good range to use for the Goal Seek would be between
158 and 160.
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
12
12

Volume
878.8681
Analysis Results
144
147.2
150.4
153.6
156.8
160

878.8681
905.6003
932.3325
959.0647
985.797
1012.529

Dismiss the Chart 1 sheet containing the graph by selecting the


Sheet 1 tab at the bottom of the worksheet.

10
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

10-13

Design Optimization

Step 7:

Set up the Goal Seek method.


From the spreadsheet menu bar, choose OptionsSetup Goal
Seek.
Make sure the method is set to Regula Falsi Method.
Click OK.

Step 8:

Perform the Goal Seek.


From the spreadsheet menu bar, choose ToolsGoal Seek.
Enter the following settings:
Variable Cell = B2
Target Cell = B6
Target Value = 1000
Lower Bracket = 158
Upper Bracket = 160
Tolerance = 1.0e-3
Max Iterations = 20
Perform NX Update on
Click OK.
Notice cells B2 and B6. The Goal Seek was successful and
resulted in a suitable length to obtain the required volume
within the tolerance.

Step 9:

Save and Exit the spreadsheet.

Step 10: Save and close the part.

10
10-14

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Design Optimization

Summary
The spreadsheet provides tools that interact with the NX part and allow you
to optimize a design by varying parameters until a desired result is achieved.
In this lesson you:

Used the Goal Analysis tool to determine an approximate range and


minimize the iterations for the Goal Seek function.

Applied the Goal Seek tool to determine a parameter value that resulted
in a desired volume.

10
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

10-15

10

11

Lesson

11 Defining Part and Assembly


Variations
Purpose
Variations of a part or assembly can be defined and managed with the
Modeling spreadsheet, providing flexibility in customizing the family
members. New variations can be created from a template part containing
a spreadsheet table.
Objective
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

Define and build variations of a piece part in a spreadsheet.

Apply lookup functions in a spreadsheet to extract data from a table.

Define and update a modular assembly that allows the spreadsheet in one
part to communicate with the spreadsheet in another part.

Control the suppression of a component using an expression.


See Also: Getting StartedWorking with PartsCommon
ToolsSpreadsheet

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

11-1

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

11

Creating Variations of a Piece Part


One of the powerful capabilities of the spreadsheet is the ability to define
variations of a part which can be updated from a table of possible parameter
values. This can be utilized, instead of the Part Family functionality, to
generate family member parts with read and write access that can be further
modified independent of the template part.

11-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

11

A Simple Variation Table


One way to generate the variations of a part is to create a simple table in
a template part using the Modeling Spreadsheet. The table contains rows
defining each variation table and columns for each parameter. A new part is
created by selecting a cell in the appropriate row and updating the part.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

11-3

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

11

Procedure: Creating a Template Part


Once the table is defined in the template part, the following steps can be used
to create a new part.
1. Start the Modeling application.
2. Choose ToolsSpreadsheet.
3. Choose EditDefine Expr Rng.
4. Define the Active Expression Range
5. Choose OptionsNX Preferences and check off Fixed Update Range and
Vertical Orientation.
6. Select a design variation.
7. Choose ToolsUpdate NX Part.
8. Choose ToolsSave Part As and specify the name of the new part.

11-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

11

Activity: Part Variations in a Spreadsheet


In this activity you will define and build variations of an in-line skate wheel
using the Modeling Spreadsheet.
If you are not running Windows, this activity is also included in the Appendix
as Part Activity: Variations in a Spreadsheet (Xess)
Step 1:

Open apd_wheel_template, and save it as ***_wheel_template.


The model has already been created. The part is in inches, but the
sketch has been created to allow input of the parameters you will
be working with in millimeters. Some of the variations require a
solid core (no spokes or cutouts). An expression will be created to
control the suppression of the core features.

1. Core
2. Outside_dia
3. Contact_radius
Step 2:

Create an expression to suppress the features defining the core of


the wheel.
Start the Modeling application, if it is not already active.
On the Edit Feature toolbar, click Suppress by Expression
, or choose EditFeatureSuppress by Expression.
From the Expression Option list, select Create shared.
From the Candidate Features list, select the feature set named
CORE(20) and click Apply.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

11-5

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

11

Click Show Expressions and note the name of the new


expression created.
CORE (20)p0=1
Step 3:

Rename the suppression expression.


Rename the expression you just created to Show_core.

Step 4:

Save your part.

Step 5:

Define the part table in the spreadsheet.


Choose ToolsSpreadsheet.
Create a table defining the wheel variations as shown below.
Make row 10 the first row of the table to allow room for data to
be added later in the lesson.
Contact_radius Outside_dia Show_core

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Fitness

f01

80

Hockey

f02
f03
f04
f05
h01
h02
r01
r02
r03

8
8
8
8
9.5
9.5
6.4
6.4
6.4

78
76
72
70
72
70
82
80
78

1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1

Racing

All of the cells containing values for the Contact_radius,


Outside_dia, and Show_core expressions should be the
General type.
Save the spreadsheet by clicking Save (on the spreadsheet
Standard toolbar).
Step 6:

Check the Preferences.


Choose OptionsNX Preferences.
Clear the Vertical Orientation and Use Fixed Update Range
check boxes..
Click OK.

11-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

Step 7:

11

Define the expression range.


Highlight cells C10 through E20.
Choose EditDefine Expr Rng.

Step 8:

Build the new wheel.


Click cell C17.
The part to build is selected by making one of the cells in
its row active.
Adjust your NX screen and your spreadsheet to view both
and observe the part during update.
Choose ToolsUpdate NX Part.
Choose FileClose & Return to Modeling.
Click OK to save the spreadsheet before exiting.
Save your NX part as ***_wheel_h02.

Step 9:

Close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

11-7

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

11

Using Table Lookup Functions


An alternative method to build a new part is to specify a part number or dash
number in a designated spreadsheet cell, and use table lookup commands to
select the appropriate parameter values from the table.
@VLOOKUP( X, R, N )
X = a search string or number, R = a range of cells, N = a numeric value
This function searches the first column in the range of cells R for the specified
string or number X. If a match is found, it returns the value N columns to the
right of the cell containing the match.
The HLOOKUP function will search data in a horizontal orientation.
In the example below, the dash number of the part to build (-13) is specified in
cell C8. The values of the parameters of the part are determined by looking
for this dash number in the first column of a table (column A). When the
dash number is found, the values in the cells one, two, and three columns to
the right are returned. Cells A4..B6 are set as the Active Expression Range
for the part.

11-8

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

11

Activity: Variations with Lookup Functions


In this activity, you will modify the spreadsheet for the skate wheel and build
a variation using table lookup functions.
If you are not running in Windows, this activity is also included in the
Appendix, as Activity: :Variations with Lookup Functions (Xess).
Step 1:

Open ***_wheel_template.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

11-9

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

11

Step 2:

Modify the spreadsheet to use table lookup functions to define


parameters.
Invoke the Modeling Spreadsheet.
A
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Fitness

Hockey
Racing

f01
f02
f03
f04
f05
h01
h02
r01
r02
r03

C
D
E
Contact_radius Outside_dia Show_core
8.0
80
1
8.0
78
1
8.0
76
1
8.0
72
1
8.0
70
1
9.5
72
0
9.5
70
0
6.4
82
1
6.4
80
1
6.4
78
1

Add data shown below to the first eight rows of the spreadsheet.
B

A
1
2
3
4
5
6

Parameters
Contact_radius
Outside_dia
Show_core

Values
6.4
82
1

Build Variation

r01

7
8

In cell B8 key in f02.


In cell B3 key in =VLOOKUP(B8,B11:E20,2)
In cell B4 key in =VLOOKUP(B8,B11:E20,3)
In cell B5 key in =VLOOKUP(B8,B11:E20,4)

11-10

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

Step 3:

11

Define the expression range.


Choose OptionsNX Preferences from the spreadsheet menu
bar.
Toggle both the Vertical Orientation and the Use Fixed Update
Range options on.
Highlight cells A3 through B5.
Choose EditDefine Expr Rng.
Save the spreadsheet by choosing the Save icon and save the
part by choosingToolsSave Part.

Step 4:

Build and save a wheel.


Enter the text r01 in cell B8.
Adjust your NX screen and your spreadsheet to view the
part during update.
Choose ToolsUpdate NX Part.
Choose FileClose & Return to Modeling.
Choose OK to save the spreadsheet before exiting.
Save your NX part as ***_wheel_r01.

Step 5:

Close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

11-11

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

11

Suppressing Components
Components may be suppressed in an assembly just as features may be
suppressed from a solid model in a piece part. Suppressed components will
not appear in assembly reports and parts lists.
In the Assembly application, there are different ways to suppress and
unsuppress components:
On the Assemblies toolbar, click Suppress Component
AssembliesComponentsSuppress Component.
On the Assemblies toolbar, click Unsuppress Component
AssembliesComponentsUnsuppress Component.

, or choose

, or choose

The Suppression dialog box can also be accessed by right clicking the
component(s) in the graphics area and choosing Suppression.
Or in the Assembly Navigator right click a node and choose
Suppression.

See Also: DesignAssembliesFunction DetailsAssemblies


MenuComponents Menu

11-12

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

11

Suppress Components by Expression


A useful method to control the suppression of a component is through the use
of an expression. This allows you to suppress or unsuppress components in
defining assembly configurations with a spreadsheet or based on the result of
a condition.
An expression may be created to control the suppress state of components
by right clicking the component (in the Part navigator) and choosing
Suppression.

The name of the expression to be created may be entered in the Expression


text field. By default, a "p-number" expression name will be created.
Once the expression is created, the component(s) may be suppressed or
unsuppressed by changing the expression value. A component is suppressed
when its associated expression equals zero and unsuppressed when it is
non-zero.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

11-13

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

11

Activity: Suppressing Comp. with Expressions


In this activity, you will suppress the brake component for certain
configurations of the in-line skate using an expression in the spreadsheet.
If you are not running in Windows, this activity is also included in the
Appendix, as Activity: :Suppressing Comp. with Expressions (Xess).
Step 1:

Open apd_mod_assm_excel.
Start the Assemblies application.

Step 2:

Clone the existing seed assembly.


Choose AssembliesCloningCreate Clone Assembly.
Choose Add Assembly.
Select the part apd_mod_assm_excel and click OK.
Choose the Naming tab.
Choose Define Naming Rule.
Choose Replace.
For the Base String, key in apd
For the Add/Replace/Rename String , key in your initials.
Click OK.
Leave the Default Output Directory blank in the Clone
Assembly dialog so the cloned parts will appear in your home
directory.
Choose the Main tab.
Choose Set Defaults.
If no error messages is generated, choose Execute.
Review then close the Information window.
Choose Close.

11-14

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

11

Step 3:

Open ***_mod_assm_excel.

Step 4:

Create an expression to control Brake Suppression


Choose ToolsExpression.
Create an expression with the name show_brake and the
value as 1.
Click OK.

Step 5:

Create an expression to control the suppression of the brake


component.
In the Assembly Navigator right click Brake and choose
Suppression.
Choose Controlled by Expression.
Enter show_brake for the expression name.
Click OK.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

11-15

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

11

Step 6:

Modify the assembly spreadsheet to exclude the brake for certain


configurations.
Invoke the Modeling Spreadsheet.
Add a column for the show_brake expression in the assembly
configuration table and enter the number 1 or 0 for each
assembly configuration as shown below.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

skt401
skt402
skt411
skt412
skt501
skt521
skt522

Frame
fr4
fr4
fr4
fr4
fr5
fr5
fr5

Wheel
w01
w02
w11
w12
w02
w21
w22

show_brake
1
1
0
0
1
0
1

Enter the name of the expression that suppresses the brake


in cell A6 .
Enter the lookup function =vlookup(b8,a11:d17,4) in cell B6
Highlight cells A6..B6 and choose EditDefine Expr Rng.
Choose FileUpdate.
Choose ToolsSave Part.

11-16

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

Step 7:

11

Build a new configuration.


Choose OptionsUpdate Methods and make sure Modular
Assembly Update is selected.
Change the configuration to skt521 in cell B8.
Choose ToolsUpdate NX Part.
This should update the assembly to a five-wheel skate without
a brake.

Step 8:

Save and exit the spreadsheet.

Step 9:

Save and close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

11-17

Defining Part and Assembly Variations

11

Summary
Part and assembly configurations can be defined in the Modeling Spreadsheet.
A template, or seed part, can be created with variations defined in a
spreadsheet table. New configurations can be generated and customized.
In this lesson you:

11-18

Defined variations of a piece part in a spreadsheet table.

Applied lookup functions to extract parameters from a spreadsheet table


based on a single part identifier.

Defined and updated assembly configurations using a modular assembly


method, allowing the spreadsheet in an assembly to pass data to the
spreadsheets of components.

Excluded a component from assembly configurations in a spreadsheet


using the Suppress by Expression option.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Appendix

A Design Intent and Model


Construction

Purpose
This appendix contains an activity to relate the design intent of a part to
the construction of the model.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

A-1

Design Intent and Model Construction

Activity: Incorporating Design Intent into a Model


In this activity, you will create a parametric model according to a given, well
defined design intent. The design intent will be incorporated into the model
through the use of the following:

A-2

Expressions

Sketch constraints

Datum features

Form features and feature operations

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Design Intent and Model Construction

Cam Pocket
Counterbored hole:
5.1 cbore diameter
3.8 cbore depth
2.5 hole diameter

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

A-3

Design Intent and Model Construction

Design Considerations

The outside radius of the part is determined by the intersection of the


88.90 vertical dimension and the 50.80 horizontal dimension.

The cam roller center (12.7dia circle) is determined by the intersection


of the counterbore hole centerline (22 degrees) and the vertical center
line of the part.

The inside radius of the part is determined by the location of the cam
roller (2.5).

The cam pocket is tilted at a 6.37 angle from vertical. The upper profile
of the pocket is made up of a 69.85 radius arc and a 38.10 radius arc that
are both tangent to the cam roller. The centers of the arcs lie along the
6.37 reference line. The width of the pocket is 19.0 and should always be
6.35 larger than the cam roller diameter.

Potential Areas for Change


The dimensions below are the most critical parameters of the part. Assume
that their values are output by an external analysis program and are likely to
change often, based on customer requirements and design optimization.

A-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Design Intent and Model Construction

When the 88.90 vertical (vdist) or 50.80 horizontal (hdist) dimension changes.

The outside diameter should change.

The origin of the counterbore hole should change and remain on the
outside diameter.

The position of the cam roller should change to align with the hole
centerline.

The 69.85 and 38.1 radius arcs on the pocket should remain tangent to
the cam roller with their centers on the 6.37 line.

The inside radius should change to remain offset 2.5 from the cam roller.

If the 12.7 cam roller diameter (roller_dia) changes.

The 69.85 radius arc and the 38.1 radius arc should be tangent with their
centers on the 6.37 reference line.

The inside radius should change and be offset 2.5 from the roller.

The width of the cam pocket (19.0) should change and be 6.35 millimeter
larger than the cam roller diameter.

If the 22 degree angle changes.

The orientation of the counterbore hole changes.

The position of the cam roller and cam pocket change.

If the 6.37 angle (tilt) changes.

The orientation of the cam pocket changes.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

A-5

Design Intent and Model Construction

Step 1:

Open apd_camsupport_1 and save it as ***_camsupport_1 (where


*** are your initials).

Curves that layout the part are provided on layer 41, along with
a category name and description to describe their function and
purpose.
The following steps are given as an example of a possible
modeling strategy that incorporates the given design
requirements. If you refer to them, it is essential that you
understand the modeling process.
Since the outside envelope, cam pocket, and counterbore hole are
closely related, the associativity between the features can be
defined with sketch constraints. Since the geometry is relatively
simple, a single sketch will be used to create multiple features.
(Separate sketches could be used for the outside diameter and
cam pocket, if desired).

A-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Design Intent and Model Construction

Step 2:

Create a sketch of the cam profile.


Make sure the WCS is set to the absolute orientation.
Create a sketch named CAM_PROFILE on Layer 21 on the
XC-YC plane.

Choose Add Existing Curves to add all of the curves to the


sketch (layer 41).
Auto Constrain the following geometric constraints:
Horizontal
Vertical
Parallel
Perpendicular
Tangent
On the Sketch Constraints toolbar, click Show/Remove
Constraints and verify all of the constraints that were created
automatically.
Remove redundant constraints that conflict with the design
intent.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

A-7

Design Intent and Model Construction

Add more geometric constraints and convert curves to reference


as shown.

1. Point on Curve
2. Arc Center on
6.37 degree line
3. Midpoint and
Point on Curve
4. Collinear with
vertical datum
axis
5. End Point on
Horizontal datum
axis

Not all constraints are necessarily shown above. Add


more constraints as needed to full constrain the sketch.
Add and name the dimensional constraints shown below.

A-8

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Design Intent and Model Construction

Add more dimensional constraints.

Step 3:

Create the root feature.


On Layer 1, create an extruded body using only the outside and
inside circles in the sketch. Use start and end distances so that
the sketch plane lies in the center of the part.

Step 4:

Create the cam pocket.


Create and subtract an extruded feature generaated from the
sketch curves defining the cam pocket profile.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

A-9

Design Intent and Model Construction

Step 5:

Create the datums to orient the counterbore hole.


Change the work layer to 61.
Create a datum plane through the endpoint and perpendicular
to the 22 degree sketch line. (Select the line and then drag the
arrow to the outer endpoint of the line).

In the Datum Plane dialog box, use the Inferred Type,


select the 22 degree line and then drag the origin (the
cube at the center of the plane) to the endpoint of the line.

A-10

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Design Intent and Model Construction

Create a second datum plane offset from the first a distance


of 25.4.
The purpose of this offset datum plane is to allow the
counterbore hole to have a "clean" entry in the outside of the
part.

Step 6:

Create the thru counterbore hole.


Create the counterbore hole using the offset datum plane as
the placement face.
Select the far side planar face of the pocket as the Thru face.
This will allow for a complete "break out" in the pocket.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

A-11

Design Intent and Model Construction

Use the following creation parameters for the hole.


C-Bore Diameter = 5.1

C-Bore Depth = 29.2


Hole Diameter = 2.5

1. Placement Face
2. Thru Face

Position the hole using the Point onto Point constraint and
select the 22 degree line as the target object.

Since the offset datum was created 25.4 millimeters


from the intersection of the hole centerline and outside
surface, the counterbore depth is the offset distance plus
the actual required depth (25.4 + 3.8 = 29.2).

A-12

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Design Intent and Model Construction

Step 7:

Instance the cam pocket around the part.


Make Layer 61 Selectable.
Create a circular array of the cam pocket and counterbore hole.
Create 12 instances and use the datum as the rotation axis.

Step 8:

Add blends.
Create 2.5 millimeter Edge Blends on all instances of the cam
pocket as shown.
Check your overflow options.

Create 2.5 millimeter Edge Blends on the outside circular


edges of the part.

Step 9:

Test the model.


Edit one of the primary expressions (hdist, vdist, or roller_dia)
and update the model.

Step 10: Save the part.


UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

A-13

Appendix

B Deform Parts
B

Purpose
Components may assume more than one shape when they are added to
an assembly through the use of Deformable Parts. This functionality is
especially useful for parts such as springs or hoses which often take on
different shapes and/or sizes.
Objectives

Define Deformable Parts.

Add Deformable Parts to an Assembly.

Edit Deformable Parts in the Assembly.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

B-1

Deform Parts

Using Flexible Components


The process of utilizing flexible components is to specify which parts are
deformable, and define the ways in which each can be deformed. Then, when
the component is being added to an assembly, the shape for that instance
is specified.
A part is defined as a Deformable part by choosing Tools Define Deformable
Part.

B-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Deform Parts

Deformable Parts dialog (NX)


The dialog box contains the following options or "pages" in the definition
of a deformable part:

Definition

Features

Expressions (optional)

References (optional)

Summary (optional)

The Back and Next buttons at the bottom of the dialog traverse through the
pages in the order stated above. If the part has been fully defined, the Finish
button ends the operation.
Definition
The Definition dialog allows you to specify a name for the part and an optional
URL for a document to provide further instructions.
Features
The Features dialog allows you to specify the features that will be part of
the deformable part.
Expressions
The Expressions dialog allows you to select available expressions to create
input parameters in the deformable part. The expressions may be given
meaningful names that will be displayed when the user is prompted.
References
The References page displays and allows the user to add to the reference
information for the part.
Summary
The Summary page displays an overall collection of data for the deformable
part.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

B-3

Deform Parts

Deforming a Component in the Assembly


Once the deformable component has been defined, it may be deformed in
the assembly.
To deform the part in the assembly, choose
AssembliesComponentsDeform Part.
The Deform Component dialog will display. Select the component to define
the deformation and choose Edit.

B-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Deform Parts

Activity: Making a Part Deformable


This activity will demonstrate how to define the parameters for deformable
components within the component part.

Step 1:

Open apd_shock_spring, save it as ***_shock_spring, and enter


the Modeling application, if it is not already active.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

B-5

Deform Parts

Step 2:

Define Features and/or expressions that will deform in the


assembly.
Choose ToolsDefine Deformable Part.
This will open up the Define Deformable Part dialog box, in
which all the parameters will be set within the component to
create the deformable feature that will be referenced by the
assembly.

With Definition (in the upper left corner of the dialog box)
selected, enter Spring Length for the Name of the feature that
will be created. Press Enter.
Click Next.
With Features selected, from the Features in Part list, select
all the listed features except the Fixed Datum Axis, and then
click Add Feature (right arrow button) to add the features to
the Features in Deformable Part list.
Fixed Datum Axis(1) was left out since it will be used for
assembly mating purposes and was not used in actual
definition of the Shock Spring.
Click Next.
With Expressions selected, select the spring_length = 5
expression from the Available Expressions list and click Add
Expression (the right arrow button) to add the highlighted
values to the Deformable Input Expressions list.
Under the Deformable Input Expressions list, type Spring
Length and press Enter.
In the Expression Rules group, select By Number Range and
then enter 4 as the Minimum and 8.5 as the Maximum.
Click Next.
Click Next again, because there are no references needed.
With Summary selected, review the list of what you selected
and then click Finish.

B-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Deform Parts

Step 3:

Open the Part Navigator and verify the new Spring Length feature.

Step 4:

Save your part but do not close it.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

B-7

Deform Parts

Activity: Adding Deformable Parts to an Assembly


This activity will demonstrate how to add and define the parameters for
deformable components within an assembly structure.
Step 1:

Open apd_suspension_assm.

B-8

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Deform Parts

Step 2:

Add the shock component parts to the assembly.


Add the apd_shock_base part to the assembly.

Apply a Center mating constraint from the bolt hole of the


shock base to the bolt hole in the lower control arm.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

B-9

Deform Parts

Apply a Mate mating constraint from the flat side of the shock
base to the flat side of the lower control arm.

B-10

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Deform Parts

Add the apd_shock_upper part to the assembly.

Apply a Center mating constraint from the bolt hole of the


upper shock to the bolt hole of the frame rail.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

B-11

Deform Parts

Reposition the upper shock to an orientation similar to the


one shown below.

Apply a Center mating constraint from the upper shock to the


lower shock as shown below.

B-12

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Deform Parts

Add the ***_shock_spring part to the assembly using the


settings listed in the image below.
Positioning: Select Origin
Reference Set: Entire Part
Layer Options: Original
Select a point out in space near the assembly for the component
origin.
Click OK to accept the spring length of 5.
If you did not want to deform the part when adding it to an
assembly, cancel out of this dialog at this time.
Make layer 61 Selectable.
Apply a Mate mating constraint from the bottom flat face of the
spring to the top flat face of the shock base.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

B-13

Deform Parts

Click Apply.

Apply a Center mating constraint from the datum axis of the


spring to the cylindrical face of the shock base. Be sure to
change the Filter to Any before trying to select the datum axis.
Click Apply.
Apply a Mate mating constraint from the upper flat face of the
spring to the bottom flat face of the upper shock.
In the Update failure list dialog box, click Ignore for each of the
listed conflicting constraints.
Click OK.
Make layer 61 Invisible.
Change the spring reference set to Model.

B-14

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Deform Parts

Step 3:

Change the spring length and observe the results.


Make sure the Modeling application is running.
In the Part Navigator double-click the ***_shock_spring
feature.
Type in a new spring_length of 4 and press Enter and then
click OK.

Step 4:

Deform the spring using the menu options.


Choose AssembliesComponentsDeform Part.
Select the spring from the graphics window and click OK.
In the Deform Component dialog box, click Edit.
For the spring_length, type 7, press Enter, and click OK.
Click Cancel.

Step 5:

Close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

B-15

Deform Parts

Activity: Deforming a Part Using a Guide String


This activity will demonstrate how to define the parameters for deformable
components using a guide string.

Step 1:

Open apd_o_ring and save it as ***_o_ring.

Step 2:

Define Features and/or expressions that will deform in the


assembly.
Start the Modeling application if it is not already active.
Choose ToolsDefine Deformable Part.
With Definition selected, enter O-Ring for the name of the
feature that will be created.
Press Enter and then click Next.
With Features selected, select the Tube feature from graphics
screen.
If it is not already listed in the Features in Deformable Part
list, click the Add Feature button (the right arrow).
Click Next.
With Expressions selected, click Next because an expression(s)
will not be specified as the deformable characteristic in this
part.
References should now be selected. This will list any external
references that will be needed at the assembly level. To change
the window prompt that comes up when this component is
added to the assembly, the reference geometry will need to be
renamed.
Rename the prompt by selecting the guide string reference
from the large window and then type O-Ring guide string for
the New prompt and then press Enter.
The line in the larger window should update.
Click Next.
With Summary selected, click Finish.

B-16

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Deform Parts

Step 3:

Open the Part Navigator and verify the new feature O-Ring(xx) in
the Part Navigator.

Step 4:

Save your part but do not close it.

Step 5:

On the Assembly Load Options dialog box, clear the Use Partial
Loading check box.

Step 6:

Open apd_pan_assm.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

B-17

Deform Parts

Step 7:

Add the ***_o_ring component.


On the Assemblies toolbar, click Add Component

Select ***_o_ring to add and choose OK.


Use the Model Reference Set and from the Positioning list,
choose Select Origin

Click OK.
Select a point out in space near the assembly for the component
origin.
The O-Ring dialog box prompts you to resolve the reference.
Select the curve in the center of the groove in the pan lid and
click OK.
Choose Cancel.
Step 8:

Change the length of the lid.


Make apd_pan_lid the
Work Part.
Choose ToolsExpression.
Select the Overall_Length expression and change it to 15.
Notice how the deformed O-Ring updated.

Step 9:

B-18

Close all parts.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Deform Parts

Summary
Components may assume more than one shape when they are added to
an assembly through the use of Flexible Components. This functionality
is especially useful for parts such as springs or hoses which often take on
different shapes and/or sizes.
In this lesson you:

Defined Deformable Parts.

Added Deformable Parts to an Assembly.

Edited Deformable Parts in the Assembly.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

B-19

Appendix

C Assembly Part Families


Purpose
The Part Families functionality allows you to define a finite number of
read-only assemblies based on a similar template assembly. The template
assembly may contain piece part components which are also part families.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

C-1

Assembly Part Families

Managing Assembly Configurations


The Part Families functionality is commonly used to define a family of similar
piece parts but it can also be used to define a family of assemblies.
When creating a part family for an assembly, components are selected to
define the columns in the part family spreadsheet.

Components can be included in an assembly family member by entering the


component part name in the appropriate cell in the column. To exclude a
component from a family member, the cell can be left blank.
In the example below, an in-line skate part family consists of four family
members. Two of the members contain four wheels, two members contain five
wheels, and only one of the configurations contains a brake. The frame and
wheels are part families themselves, so their respective columns contain the
names of a family member.

C-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Part Families

Defining a part family for assembly configurations does require careful


planning. The following considerations should be taken into account when
developing an assembly part family.

All possible components must be present in the template assembly even if


they are not used in every family member. In the case of a skate-assm,
the brake must be included in the template part even though it is only
included in one configuration.

All components that are part families themselves must be represented in


the assembly by their template part.

All components that are part families must have the family members
created ahead of time in order to be referenced in the assembly
configurations.

The family members of a part family are read-only. They can only
be modified by editing the family table (spreadsheet) in the template
assembly and updating the family members.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

C-3

Assembly Part Families

Activity: Creating an Assembly Part Family


In this activity, you will define a part family for an in-line skate assembly.
The assembly will vary in the number of wheels, the type of wheels, and the
presence of a brake.

Step 1:

Clone an existing skate assembly.


Choose AssembliesCloningCreate Clone Assembly.
Choose Add Assembly.
Select the part apd_skate_assm_excel.
Choose the Naming tab.
Click Define Naming Rule.
Click Replace.
For the Base String, key in apd_.
For the Add/Replace/Rename String, key in your initials
followed by an underscore.
Click OK.
Enter the pathname for your home directory as the Default
Output Directory. Consult your instructor if necessary.
Choose the Main tab.
Click Set Defaults.
If no error messages were generated, click Execute to execute
the clone operation and then Close the Information window
and the Clone Assembly dialog box.

C-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Part Families

Step 2:

Open ***_skate_assm_excel.
The following preparations have already been completed:
All components were added to the assembly and mated except
the brake.
Since the frame and wheel are part families, the template parts
were added.
A wheel, a set of spacers, and a set of bearings were mated to
a hole in the frame and used to create component arrays with
the From Feature ISET option.
Since the wheels will vary between configurations, each
occurrence of the wheel was given a unique name (WHEEL-1,
WHEEL-2, etc.).
You may need to add the Components Name column to
the Assemblies Navigator to be able to see this.

Step 3:

Create the family members for the frame.


Make ***_frame_fam_excel the Work Part.
In the Modeling application, choose ToolsPart Families.
In the Part Families dialog box, make sure the Importable Part
Families Template check box is cleared, and click Edit
The template part for the frame contains an expression for
the number of wheels which controls the number of holes and
length of the frame. The part family table contains rows for
two family members; a four-wheel and a five-wheel frame.
Edit the names of the family members in cells A4 and A5 to
include your initials instead of "apd".
Select the two rows defining the family members (4 and 5).
Choose Part FamilyCreate Parts.
Note the Information window contents, then dismiss the
Information window.
In the Part Families dialog box, click Resume.
In the part family spreadsheet, choose Part FamilyCancel.
In the Part Families dialog box, choose Cancel

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

C-5

Assembly Part Families

Step 4:

Create the family members for the wheel.


Make ***_wheel_fam_excel the work part.
Choose ToolsPart Families.
In the Part Families dialog box, make sure the Importable Part
Families Template check box is cleared, and click Edit
The part family table for the wheel also contains rows for two
family members; a standard wheel and a performance wheel,
with each having a different outside diameter.
Edit the names of the family members in cells A4 and A5 to
include your initials instead of "apd".

Select the two rows defining the family members (4 and 5).
Choose Part FamilyCreate Parts.
Note the Information window contents, then dismiss the
Information window.
In the Part Families dialog box, click Resume.
In the part family spreadsheet, choose Part FamilyCancel.
In the Part Families dialog box, choose Cancel
You will now define the family members of the assembly. This
is similar to defining the family members of a standard part
except you will select components as the attribute class.
Step 5:

C-6

Create the family table for the assembly.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Part Families

Make ***_skate_assm_excel the work part.


Save all parts.
Choose ToolsPart Families.
In the Part Families dialog box, make sure the Importable Part
Families Template check box is cleared.
From the Available Columns list, choose Components.
Select the ***_FRAME_FAM_EXCEL component from the
Available Columns list in the Part Families dialog and click
Add Column.
You can also double-click the items in this list box to add
them to the Chosen Columns list box.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

C-7

Assembly Part Families

Double-click ***_SKT_BRAKE_EXCEL component to add it as


a column.
Double-click on the remaining components in the following
order to add them to the Chosen Columns list.
WHEEL-1
WHEEL-2
WHEEL-3
WHEEL-4
WHEEL-5

***_SKT_BEARING_EXCEL
***_SKT_SPACER_EXCEL
Click Create.
Define the family members for four skate configurations by
entering the data in the spreadsheet cells as shown. Use your
initials in place of ***. (Utilize the Copy and Paste options in
the spreadsheet.)

As shown above, only the ***_skate_03 should have a brake. Also,


the only parts that should get a WHEEL_5 are ***_skate_03 and
***_skate_04.

C-8

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Part Families

Choose Part FamilySave Family from the spreadsheet menu


bar.
The spreadsheet data is now complete. There are several
things that you need to know to understand the current
condition of the spreadsheet and why it will work.

Row 1 is automatically filled in with the attributes chosen.

Cell A2 is empty when the part family is created.

The rest of row 2 is filled in with the values represented


in the template part.

Any row not containing a value in column A is ignored.

Empty rows are allowed.

By leaving row two without a part name, it represents the


template part. This may be a desired condition if the template
part does not represent a real part configuration. In this case,
the template includes five wheels and a brake but this is not
actually one of the configurations.
You do not have to create a family member part to
test a configuration. You can use the Verify option to
temporarily generate a family member.
Step 6:

Verify a configuration.
In the Part Families dialog box, click Edit.
Highlight one of the family member rows.
Choose Part FamilyVerify Part.
In the Part Families dialog, click Resume
Verify another configuration, if desired, and exit the
spreadsheet.

Step 7:

Save and close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

C-9

Appendix

D Microsoft Excel Add-in


Purpose
The following pages list the various operations that may be used in
expressions.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

D-1

Microsoft Excel Add-in

Operators
There are several types of operators that you may use in the expression
language.
Arithmetic Operators
+
-

Addition

*
/
%
^

Multiplication
Division

Subtraction and Negative


Sign

Modulus
Exponential
Assignment

Example
p2 = p5 + p3
p2 = p5 p3
p2 = p5 * p3
p2 = p5 / p3
p2 = p5 % p3
p2 = p5^2
p2 = p5

Other Operators
>

<
>=
<=
==
!=

D-2

Greater Than
Less Than
Greater Than or Equal
Less Than or Equal
Equal
Not Equal
Negate

!
&&

Logical AND

||

Logical OR

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Microsoft Excel Add-in

Precedence and Associativity


In the table below, operators in the same row have equal precedence while
operators in the following rows have less precedence.
Precedence and Associativity
Operators
Associativity
^

Right to Left

- (change sign)
*/%
+
> < >= <=
== !=

Left to Right

&&
||
=

Right to Left

When using operators with the same precedence in an equation without


parameters, use left-to-right or right-to-left rule from the table. For example:
X = 90 10 + 30
X = 110 (not 50)
X = 90 (10 + 30)
X = 50

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

D-3

Microsoft Excel Add-in

Built-in Functions
You may also use the built-in functions in expressions. Built-in functions
include trigonometric, exponential, and factorial functions. Functions are also
provided for unit conversion.
Built-in Functions for Unit Conversion
Name
Description

D-4

cm

cm(x) converts x from centimeters


into the default units of the part.

ft

ft(x) converts x from feet into the


default units of the part.

grd

grd(x) converts x from gradients to


degrees.

in

in(x) converts x from inches into the


default units of the part.

km

km(x) converts x kilometers into the


default units of the part .

mc

mc(x) converts x from the microns


into the default units of the part.

min

min(x) converts x from minutes into


degrees.

ml

ml(x) converts x from mils into the


default units of the part.

mm

mm(x) converts x from millimeters


into the default units of the part.

mtr

mtr(x) converts x from meters into


the default units of the part.

sec

sec(x) converts x from seconds into


degrees.

yd

yd(x) converts x from yards into the


default units of the part.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Microsoft Excel Add-in

Scientific Notation
you can also enter a statement in scientific notation. The value you enter
must contain a positive or negative sign. For example, you can enter:
2e+5 which is the same as the value 200000
2e-5 which is the same as the value .00002.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

D-5

Appendix

E Spreadsheet Reference
Information
Purpose
This appendix contains additional information pertaining to the NX
Spreadsheet.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

E-1

Spreadsheet Reference Information

Differences Between Xess and Excel


Both Xess and Microsoft Excel will function exactly the same in conjunction
with NX, except for the following operations:

In Xess, a function name is preceded by the "@" character. If a function is


entered without the "@" character in Xess, it is added automatically.

When specifying a range for a function, Excel uses a colon ( : ) where


Xess uses two periods ( .. ).

For array functions, or functions that take up more than one cell in the
spreadsheet, the input for the spreadsheets differ. In Xess you select the
first cell, type in the function, and press the enter key. In Excel, you must
first select all of the cells that the function will fill, type in the function,
and then hit Ctrl-Shift-Enter.

Graphs created in Excel are opened as a sheet in a workbook, whereas in


Xess it would open as its own window. Different sheets in a workbook can
be displayed by selecting the tabs at the bottom of the screen. When you
create a new graph, that sheet will automatically be displayed.

E-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Spreadsheet Reference Information

Migrating Spreadsheet Data


The Gateway, Modeling, or Part Families spreadsheet data stored in a part
can be migrated from Excel format to XESS format and vice versa by choosing
FileUtilitiesMigrate Spreadsheet Data.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

E-3

Spreadsheet Reference Information

Extended Functionality
The following pages list information pertaining to the spreadsheet
pull-down menu items and functions in the Gateway Spreadsheet.
This information can also be found in the Gateway on-line help
(HELPDOCUMENTATION) by selecting: CADGatewayGateway
Menu & Dialog RefererencesToolsSpreadsheetGateway
SpreadsheetSpreadsheet Menu Options and Extended Functionality.
While the Gateway spreadsheet is active, you will see the following additional
items on spreadsheet pull-down menus.
ToolsSave Part
ToolsSave Part As...
FileSave
FileOpen

Save work part.


Save the work part under a new
name.
Save the spreadsheet data in the
work part.
Load the spreadsheet data from the
work part.

ConnectionsDisconnect

Return control to NX (Xess only).

ViewRefresh

Refresh the graphics window.

In addition to the normal built-in functions, the spreadsheet adds some


additional functions that more tightly integrate the spreadsheet with NX.

An example of a spreadsheet built-in function is, @SUM(c1,c2). The @SUM


function adds the values in the cells specified by c1 and c2, and loads the
current cell with the results of that calculation. You would find this sort of
function in virtually any spreadsheet. In the same manner, the spreadsheet
supports special built-in functions that work with NX data and parts.
An example of an NX built-in function in the spreadsheet environment
is @UGEXPR("P1"). This function fetches the value of an expression in
NX specified by name, which in this case is the string, P1. The built-in
functions provided by NX for the spreadsheet environment allow you to relate
spreadsheet calculations directly to objects or other part information, as well
as perform specialized mathematical functions. The NX built-in functions
are described below.

E-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Spreadsheet Reference Information

Vector-Related Functions
Vector functions take ranges of spreadsheet cells as the components of a
vector and return either scalar values in the current cell, or vector values
as a horizontal row of cells.
A vector, such as vector1, is specified by a range of 3 cells (e.g., B1..B3)
in either a horizontal or vertical orientation. A scalar value may be
specified by a literal value (0.5), or a cell reference to either a formula
or a value.
ADDVEC( vector1, vector2 )
Returns the sum of two vectors. vector=vector1+vector2
AFFINEVEC(scalar,vector1,vector2)
Returns the affine vector combination. vector=vector1 + (scalar*vector2)
ANGLEVEC(vector1,vector2,vector3)
Returns the angle between vector1 and vector2 in the plane defined by the
normal vector3. The angle ranges from zero to 2*PI.
CONVEXVEC(scalar,vector1,vector2)
Returns the convex vector combination. vector=( scalar*vector1) +
((1-scalar)*vector2)
CROSSVEC( vector1, vector2 )

Returns the cross product of two vectors.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

E-5

Spreadsheet Reference Information

DOTVEC( vector1,vector2 )
Returns the scalar dot product between two vectors.
LINEARVEC( scalar1,scalar2,vector1,vector2)
Returns the linear vector combination. vector=( scalar1*vector1) +
(scalar2*vector2)
NEGVEC( vector1 )
Returns the inverse (negated) vector.
SCALEVEC( scalar, vector )
Multiplies a vector by a scalar.
SUBVEC( vector1, vector2 )
Subtracts two vectors.
UNITVEC( vector1 )
Returns a unit vector.
VECMAG( vector1 )
Returns the length (magnitude) of a vector.

E-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Spreadsheet Reference Information

Matrix functions
Matrix functions deal with 3x3 matrices, and take a range of cells for input to
a matrix function, and output 3x3 sets of cells as values of a matrix.
Vector arguments for matrix functions, such as norm_vec, are specified
by a 2-D range of cells (e.g. A1..C3).
MTXROT(angle, norm_vec)
Returns a matrix from the rotation by angle about a vector.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

E-7

Spreadsheet Reference Information

Point-Related Functions
Point functions deal with point coordinates and vectors.
Point coordinate or vector arguments, such as pt or vector, are specified
by a range of 3 cells (e.g., A1..A3).
DELTAPT( distance, pt, vector )
Offset a point by a distance along a vector and return the new point. new_pt
= pt + (distance*vector)
DIRPT( pt1, pt2 )
Returns a unit vector direction from point 1 to point 2.
DISTPERP( pt, line_pt, line_vec )
Returns the perpendicular (shortest) distance from the point pt to the line
defined by the point line_pt and the vector line_vec.
DISTPROJ( pt1, pt2, vector1)
Distance between two points in the plane defined by the normal vector1.
DISTPT( pt1, pt2 )
Returns the distance between two points.

INTERVEC( pt1, vec1, pt2, vec2 )


Returns the intersection point for two lines defined by a point and a vector. If
the lines fail to intersect, a message is returned in the cell.
ROTPT( angle, pt, vector )
Rotate a point by an angle around a vector and returns the new point
(effectively the combination of MTXROT and XFORMPT).
XFORMPT(pt, matrix)
Transform a point with a matrix and return the new point.

E-8

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Spreadsheet Reference Information

Expression-Related Functions
Expression-related functions return information about NX expressions. The
left-hand side (LHS) of the equation is the parameter name of the expression.
The right-hand side (RHS) of the equation is the expression string.
Parameter names, such as parameter_name, are string arguments and
may be specified by the string in double quotes, such as "Height", or
by a cell reference to that string.
UGEXPR( "parameter_name")
Returns an expression string given the parameter name of an NX expression.
This can be an interpart expression if that part is loaded. If the part is not
loaded you will get an error message in the cell.
EXPRVAL( "parameter_name" )
Returns the value of an expression given the name of an NX expression. This
function also works for interpart expressions that are used in this part.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

E-9

Spreadsheet Reference Information

Object-Related Functions
Object-related functions generally work on a specific NX object. In order to
use an object with one of these spreadsheet functions, you will need to assign
an NX name attribute to the object.
Object-related functions may take string or numeric arguments. String
arguments such as object_name may be specified by the string in
double quotes, such as LINE1, or by a cell reference to that string.
UGATTR( "object_name", "attribute_title", attribute_type )
Returns an attribute value given an NX object name, a user-defined attribute
title and a numeric attribute type. The numeric attribute type may be:
1 = integer attribute 2 = real attribute 3 = string attribute 4 = reference
attribute
If the object name is the string "PART", then the specified part attribute title
and type for the work part will be returned.
UGNAMES()
Returns the object name, object type and subtype, and layer of all named
geometric objects in the work part. One row of information will be returned
per object.

ALLATTR("object_name")
Returns all the integer, real and string attribute titles and types associated
with a given object. If the object name is the string "PART", then all integer,
real and string part attribute titles and types will be returned.
ARCLEN( "object_name", param1, param2, units )
Returns arc length of a curve between two parameter values param1 and
param2. This function will work on any curve type, such as arcs, circles,
conics and lines.
Parameter values are from 0.0 to 1.0. Units conversion is a number from 1
to 4, where:
1 = INCHES 2 = MILLIMETERS 3 = CENTIMETERS 4 = METERS
If the object is not a curve, you will get the message:
@ARCLEN: Curve object type required.
EVALCRV( "object_name", eval_type, param1, param2, steps )
Returns curve evaluation information for a number of steps along a curve
between two parameter values param1 and param2.
E-10

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Spreadsheet Reference Information

Parameter values range from 0.0 to 1.0, and the number of steps can be from
1 to 100. Curve evaluation types are:
Type

# Value

Description

1
2

3
1

Point

4
5

3
3

Curvature
Normalized curvature
Tangent
Binormal

6
7
8

3
1
3

Principle Normal
Torsion
Derivative

When multiple steps are used between parameter values the first column
will contain the evaluated parameter value, and the column(s) to the right
will contain the data value(s), so that the data is in a form acceptable to the
graphing functions in the spreadsheet.
As with ARCLEN, this function will work on any curve type and will return
an error message if the object is not a curve.
EVALSRF( "object_name", eval_type, umin, umax, numu, vmin, vmax, numv )
For EVALSRF, the object must be a face. The function returns surface
evaluation information for a number of steps in u and v between two
parameter values.

Parameter values range from 0.0 to 1.0, number of steps from 1 to 100.
Surface evaluation types are:
Type
1
2
3
4

# Values
1
1
1
1

Description
Gaussian curvature
Mean curvature
Min radius
Max radius

When multiple steps are used between parameter values, the output will be
in a form compatible with the graphing functions. If just u or v are changing
you get output in the same form as @EVALCRV. If both u and v are changing
you get output compatible with a surface graph.
POINT( object_name" )
Returns the "defining" xyz position for object in the current cell and the next
two columns. For circles, arcs and elliptical conics the center of the circle is
returned. For planes and coordinate systems the object origin is returned.
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

E-11

Spreadsheet Reference Information

The function recognizes the following types of NX objects:


RM_point_type, RM_gfem_node_type, RM_mdm_analysis_pt_type,
RM_conic_type RM_circle_type, RM_coordinate_system_type, RM_plane_type
Use of other object types will result in the error message:
@POINT: Unable to process object type.
MASS3D( object_name", type, units )
Returns mass properties for a solid referenced by the parameter "object."
Single return values are returned in the cell. Multiple values are returned in
sets of 3 columns. When all properties (type=0) are returned, each property is
placed in consecutive rows of the spreadsheet. Multiple values for a property
are placed in adjacent columns.
object name string
component part name
PART
SOLIDS
SHEETS

extracts mass properties of a single


solid or sheet with the given name
extracts mass properties of all solids
and sheets in the component part
extracts mass properties for all solids
and sheets in the part
extracts mass properties for all solids
in the part
extracts mass properties for all
sheets in the part

Units are:
1

pounds & inches

2
3

pounds & feet

E-12

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

grams & centimeters


kilograms & meters

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Spreadsheet Reference Information

Values for the type field are shown below.


Type

# Values

Description

0
1

42
1

3
4

1
3

Moments of Inertia
w.r.t. CofM Origin/WCS
Axes

10

Spherical Moment of
Inertia w.r.t. CofM
Origin/WCS Axes
Inertia Products w.r.t.
WCS Axes and Origin
Inertia Products w.r.t.
CofM Origin/WCS Axes

11

3x3=9

Principle Axes, WCS

12

Principle Moments w.r.t.


CofM Origin

13

Radii of Gyration w.r.t.


WCS Axes and Origin

14

Radii of Gyration w.r.t.


CofM Origin/WCS Axes

15

16

Spherical Radius of
Gyration w.r.t. CofM
Origin/WCS Axes
Density

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

All properties
Area
Volume
Mass
Center of Mass (CofM),
WCS
First Moments, WCS
Axes and Origin
Moments of Inertia with
respect to (w.r.t.) WCS
Axes and Origin

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

E-13

Appendix

F Introduction to the NX
SpreadsheetXess Activities
Purpose
This section provides the activities for the Introduction to NX Spreadsheets
lesson, for those running NX on Unix workstations.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

F-1

Introduction to the NX SpreadsheetXess Activities

Activity: Timing Gear Spreadsheet (Xess)


In this activity, you will create an XESS spreadsheet to control the expressions
and formulas in an existing model.
Step 1:

Open apd_timing_gear, and Save it as ***_timing_gear_xess.

The design intent for this part dictates that the gear be driven by
the following parameters:
Number of Teeth
Pitch Diameter
Face Width

The following additional parameters are calculated:


Diametral Pitch
Tooth Thickness
Outside Diameter
Base Diameter

F-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Introduction to the NX SpreadsheetXess Activities

Step 2:

Examine and modify the part.


Start the Modeling application, if it is not already active.
Using the Part Navigator review the features used to construct
the part.
Examine the expressions in the Expressions dialog.
Edit the following expressions and update the part.
no_of_teeth = 32
pitch_dia = 190.5

Step 3:

Activate the Modeling Spreadsheet and extract expressions.


Choose ToolsSpreadsheet.
From the spreadsheet menu bar. choose OptionsNX
Preferences
If necessary select the Vertical Orientation and Use Fixed
Update Range check boxes. Leave the others cleared.
Highlight cell A1.
Choose ToolsExtract Expr.
This will extract all of the expressions from the part and
add them to the spreadsheet. The expression names will be
placed in column A and titled Parameters and the expression
values are placed in column B.
Adjust the widths of the two columns for a better view of
the contents.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

F-3

Introduction to the NX SpreadsheetXess Activities

Step 4:

Clear unwanted expressions.


Only the expressions with user-defined names will be evaluated
in the spreadsheet.
Remove all expressions except the following:
no_of_teeth = 32
pitch_dia = 190.5
face_width = 20
Arrange the expressions so they appear in rows two, three, and
four in the appropriate columns.

Step 5:

Add headers for the Expression column.


Select cell B1 and type Expressions.
Make the text in cell B1 bold and italicized for easier
identification.
A
1
2
3
4

Step 6:

Parameters
no_of_teeth
pitch_dia
face_width

B
Expressions
32
190.5
20

Test the spreadsheet.


Change the following values in the Expressions column:

no_of_teeth = 28
pitch_dia = 152.4
Face_width = 30
As you change the expressions the part will not update
until you explicitly request it from the spreadsheet. This
allows you to go through multiple design iterations and
check your equation values before waiting for the solid
model to update.

F-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Introduction to the NX SpreadsheetXess Activities

Step 7:

Define the Expression Range and update the part.


To restrict an update to a specific set of expressions,
an Active Expression Range can be defined. Only the
expressions in these cells are used to update the part from
the spreadsheet.
Select cells A2 through B4.
From the menu bar, choose EditDefine Expr Rng.
The message confirming that you have set the range
should appear in the lower left portion of the spreadsheet
window.
From the menu bar, choose ToolsUpdate NX Part.
The spreadsheet will send the new expression
information to the part and update the model with the
new values.

Step 8:

Save the spreadsheet and the part.


From the spreadsheet menu bar, choose FileExit.
Choose OK when prompted as to whether or not to save the
current spreadsheet data.
Choose FileSave to save the part.

Step 9:

Do not close the part. It will be used in the next activity.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

F-5

Introduction to the NX SpreadsheetXess Activities

Activity: Mass Properties in a Spreadsheet (Xess)


In this activity, you will use the mass properties function in the spreadsheet
to obtain the weight of a solid.
Step 1:

Continue using ***_timing_gear_xess in the Modeling application,


if it is not already active.

Step 2:

Assign an attribute name to the gear solid so the spreadsheet will


be able to identify the solid to use in the analysis.
Choose EditProperties.
Select the solid body from the graphics area and choose OK.

Enter gear for the name and choose OK.

F-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Introduction to the NX SpreadsheetXess Activities

Step 3:

Assign a density to the solid.


Choose EditFeatureSolid Density.
In the Units list, select Grams - Centimeters.
Enter a density of 7.249 and press Enter.
Select the solid body and choose OK.
A density may also be assigned to a solid by assigning a
material to it.
Choose ToolsMaterial Properties.
Choose Library.
In the Search Criteria dialog, make sure the category is
set to Metals and choose OK.
Select a material from the list of metals and OK.
In the Materials dialog, select the solid and choose OK.
These material properties are also used by the Structures
and Motion applications
Choose Cancel on the Edit Solid Density dialog.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

F-7

Introduction to the NX SpreadsheetXess Activities

Step 4:

Add a mass properties function to the spreadsheet.


Choose ToolsSpreadsheet.
In cell B12 enter the title Timing Gear Mass.
In cell B13 enter @mass3d("gear",3,1).
In the Xess application, an "@" symbol will automatically be
added to precede the function name.
A
1
2

Parameters
No_of_teeth

Pitch_dia

Face_width

B
Expressions
28

152.4

32
Timing Gear Mass
5.770377309

12
13

Depending on the settings, the formula in cell B13 may


appear as text rather than a numerical value. If so, edit
the Cell Format and change it to Default.
Step 5:

Change the width of the gear.


Change the expression Face_width to 1.25 in the spreadsheet.
Choose ToolsUpdate NX Part and note the change to the
value of the mass.

F-8

Step 6:

Exit and save the spreadsheet.

Step 7:

Save and Close the part.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Appendix

G Defining Part and Assembly


VariationsXess Activities
Purpose
This section provides the activities for the Defining Part and Assembly
Variations for those running NX on Unix workstations.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

G-1

Defining Part and Assembly VariationsXess Activities

Activity: Part Variations in a Spreadsheet (Xess)


In this activity, you will define and build variations of an in-line skate wheel
using the Modeling Spreadsheet.
Step 1:

Open apd_wheel_template, and save it as ***_wheel_template.


The model has already been created. Some of the variations
require a solid core (no spokes or cutouts). An expression will be
created to control the suppression of the core features.

Step 2:

Create an expression to suppress the features defining the core of


the wheel.
Enter the Modeling application, if it is not already active.
On the Edit Feature toolbar, click Suppress by Expression
, or choose EditFeatureSuppress by Expression.
From the Expression Option list, select Create shared.

From the Candidate Features list, select the feature set named
CORE(20) and click Apply.
Click Show Expressions and note the name of the new
expression created.
CORE (20)p0=1
Cancel the Suppression by Expression dialog box.
Step 3:

Rename the suppression expression.


Rename the expression you just created to Show_core.

G-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Defining Part and Assembly VariationsXess Activities

Step 4:

Save the part.

Step 5:

Define the part table in the spreadsheet.


Choose ToolsSpreadsheet.
Create a table defining the wheel variations as shown below.
Make row 10 the first row of the table to allow room for data to
be added later in the lesson.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Fitness

Hockey
Racing

20

f01
f02
f03
f04
f05
h01
h02
r01
r02

Contact_radius Outside_dia Show_core


8.0
80
1
8.0
78
1
8.0
76
1
8.0
72
1
8.0
70
1
9.5
72
0
9.5
70
0
6.4
82
1
6.4
80
1

r03

6.4

78

All of the cells containing values for the Contact_radius,


Outside_dia, and Show_core expressions should be the
Default type.
Save the spreadsheet (on the spreadsheet toolbar) by clicking
Save File.
Step 6:

Check the Preferences.


Choose OptionsNX Preferences.

Clear the Vertical Orientation and Use Fixed Update Range


check boxes.
Click OK.
Step 7:

Define the expression range.


Highlight cells C10 through E20.
Choose EditDefine Expr Rng.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

G-3

Defining Part and Assembly VariationsXess Activities

Step 8:

Build and save a wheel.


Click cell C17. (The part to build is selected by making one
of the cells in its row active.)
On the spreadsheet menu bar, choose ToolsUpdate NX Part.
Adjust your NX screen and your spreadsheet to view the
part during update.
Choose ToolsSave Part As.
Save the NX part as ***_wheel_h02.

Step 9:

Exit the spreadsheet.


Choose FileExit.
Choose OK.

Step 10: Save and close the part.

G-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Defining Part and Assembly VariationsXess Activities

Activity: Variations with Lookup Functions (Xess)


In this activity, you will modify the spreadsheet for the skate wheel and build
a variation using table lookup functions.
Step 1:

If necessary open ***_wheel_template.

Step 2:

Modify the spreadsheet to use table lookup functions to define


parameters.
Invoke the Modeling Spreadsheet.
A
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Fitness

Hockey
Racing

B
f01
f02
f03
f04
f05
h01
h02
r01
r02
r03

D
E
C
Contact_radius Outside_dia Show_core
8.0
80
1
8.0
78
1
8.0
76
1
8.0
72
1
8.0
70
1
9.5
72
0
9.5
70
0
6.4
82
1
6.4
80
1
6.4
78
1

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

G-5

Defining Part and Assembly VariationsXess Activities

Add data to the first eight rows of the spreadsheet as shown


below. The cells B3 through B5 are the Text cell format. The
cells C3 through C5 are set equal to the corresponding cells in
column B and are the Default cell format.
A

Step 3:

1
2

Parameters

Contact_radius @VLOOKUP(B8,B11..E20,1)

6.4

4
5
6
7
8

Outside_dia
Show_core

@VLOOKUP(B8,B11..E20,2)
@VLOOKUP(B8,B11..E20,3)

78
1

Expression

Values

Build Variation

Define the expression range.


Choose OptionsNX Preferences from the spreadsheet menu
bar.
Select both the Vertical Orientation and the Use Fixed Update
Range check boxes.
Highlight cells A3 through B5.
Choose EditDefine Expr Rng.
Save the spreadsheet (FileSave) and save the part
(ToolsSave Part).

G-6

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Defining Part and Assembly VariationsXess Activities

Step 4:

Build and save a wheel.


Enter the text r01 in cell B8.
Choose ToolsUpdate NX Part.
Choose ToolsSave Part As.
Save the part as ***_wheel_r01.

Step 5:

Exit the spreadsheet and close all parts.


Choose FileExit.
Choose OK.
Choose FileCloseSave and Close.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

G-7

Defining Part and Assembly VariationsXess Activities

Activity: Suppressing Comp. with Expressions (Xess)


In this activity, you will suppress the brake component for certain
configurations of the in-line skate using an expression in the spreadsheet.
Step 1:

Open apd_mod_assm.
Start the Assemblies application.

Step 2:

Clone the existing seed assembly.


Choose AssembliesCloningCreate Clone Assembly.
Choose Add Assembly.
Select the part apd_mod_assm and choose OK.
Choose the Naming tab.
Choose Define Naming Rule.
Choose Replace.
For the Base String, key in apd
For the Add/Replace/Rename string, key in your initials.
Choose OK.
Leave the Default Output Directory blank in the Clone
Assembly dialog so the cloned parts will appear in your home
directory.
Choose the Main tab.
Choose Set Defaults.

If no error messages is generated, choose Execute.


Choose Close.
Review then close the Information window.

G-8

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Defining Part and Assembly VariationsXess Activities

Step 3:

Open ***_mod_assm.

Step 4:

Create an expression to control the suppression of the brake


component.
In the Assembly Navigator right click the Brake node and
choose Suppression.

Choose Controlled by Expression.


In the Expression Editor, change the supporession control
expression name to show_brake.
Click OK.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

G-9

Defining Part and Assembly VariationsXess Activities

Step 5:

Modify the assembly spreadsheet to exclude the brake from certain


configurations.
Invoke the Modeling Spreadsheet.
Add a column for the show_brake expression in the assembly
configuration table and enter the number 1 or 0 for each
assembly configuration as shown below.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

skt401
skt402
skt411
skt412
skt501
skt521
skt522

Frame
fr4
fr4
fr4
fr4
fr5
fr5
fr5

Wheel
w01
w02
w11
w12
w02
w21
w22

show_brake
1
1
0
0
1
0
1

Enter the name of the expression that suppresses the brake


in cell A6 .
Enter the lookup function =vlookup(b8,a11..d17,3) in cell B6
Highlight cells A6..B6 and choose EditDefine Expr Rng.
Choose FileSave.
Choose ToolsUpdate NX Part.

G-10

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Defining Part and Assembly VariationsXess Activities

Step 6:

Build a new configuration.


Choose OptionsUpdate Methods and make sure Modular
Assembly Update is selected.
Change the configuration to skt521 in cell B8.
Choose ToolsUpdate NX Part.
This should update the assembly to a five-wheel skate without
a brake.

Step 7:

Save and exit the spreadsheet.

Step 8:

Save and close all parts.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

G-11

Appendix

H Assembly Part FamiliesXess


Activity
Purpose
This section provides the activities for Assembly Part Families for those those
running NX on Unix workstations.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

H-1

Assembly Part FamiliesXess Activity

Activity: Creating an Assembly Part Family


In this activity, you will define a part family for an in-line skate assembly.
The assembly will vary in the number of wheels, the type of wheels, and the
presence of a brake.

Step 1:

Clone an existing skate assembly.


Choose AssembliesCloningCreate Clone Assembly.
Choose Add Assembly.
Select the part apd_skate_assm.
Choose the Naming tab.
Click Define Naming Rule.
Click Replace.
For the Base String, key in apd_.
For the Add/Replace/Rename String, key in your initials
followed by an underscore.
Click OK.
Enter the pathname for your home directory as the Default
Output Directory. Consult your instructor if necessary.
Choose the Main tab.

Click Set Defaults.


If no error messages were generated, click Execute to execute
the clone operation and then Close the Clone Assembly dialog
box. Then review and Close the Information window.
H-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Part FamiliesXess Activity

Step 2:

Open ***_skate_assm.
The following preparations have already been completed:
All components were added to the assembly and mated except
the brake.
Since the frame and wheel are part families, the template parts
were added.
A wheel, a set of spacers, and a set of bearings were mated to
a hole in the frame and used to create component arrays with
the From Feature ISET option.
Since the wheels will vary between configurations, each
occurrence of the wheel was given a unique name (WHEEL-1,
WHEEL-2, etc.).
You may need to add the Components Name column to
the Assemblies Navigator to be able to see this.

Step 3:

Create the family members for the frame.


Make ***_frame_fam the Work Part.
In the Modeling application, choose ToolsPart Families.
In the Part Families dialog box, make sure the Importable Part
Families Template check box is cleared, and click Edit
The template part for the frame contains an expression for
the number of wheels which controls the number of holes and
length of the frame. The part family table contains rows for
two family members; a four-wheel and a five-wheel frame.
Edit the names of the family members in cells A4 and A5 to
include your initials instead of "apd".
Select the two rows defining the family members (4 and 5).
Choose Part FamilyCreate Parts.
Note the Information window contents, then dismiss the
Information window.

In the Part Families dialog box, click Resume.


In the part family spreadsheet, choose Part FamilyCancel.
In the Part Families dialog box, choose Cancel
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

H-3

Assembly Part FamiliesXess Activity

Step 4:

Create the family members for the wheel.


Make ***_wheel_fam the work part.
Choose ToolsPart Families.
In the Part Families dialog box, make sure the Importable Part
Families Template check box is cleared, and click Edit
The part family table for the wheel also contains rows for two
family members; a standard wheel and a performance wheel,
with each having a different outside diameter.
Edit the names of the family members in cells A4 and A5 to
include your initials instead of "apd".
Select the two rows defining the family members (4 and 5).
Choose Part FamilyCreate Parts.
Note the Information window contents, then dismiss the
Information window.
In the Part Families dialog box, click Resume.
In the part family spreadsheet, choose Part FamilyCancel.
In the Part Families dialog box, choose Cancel
You will now define the family members of the assembly. This
is similar to defining the family members of a standard part
except you will select components as the attribute class.

Step 5:

Create the family table for the assembly.


Make ***_skate_assm the work part.
Save all parts.
Choose ToolsPart Families.
In the Part Families dialog box, make sure the Importable Part
Families Template check box is cleared.

From the Available Columns list, choose Components.


Select the ***_FRAME_FAM component from the Available
Columns list in the Part Families dialog and click Add Column.
You can also double-click the items in this list box to add
them to the Chosen Columns list box.
H-4

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Assembly Part FamiliesXess Activity

Double-click ***_SKT_BRAKE component to add it as a column.


Double-click on the remaining components in the following
order to add them to the Chosen Columns list.
WHEEL-1
WHEEL-2
WHEEL-3
WHEEL-4
WHEEL-5
***_SKT_BEARING
***_SKT_SPACER
Click Create.
Define the family members for four skate configurations by
entering the data in the spreadsheet cells as shown. Use your
initials in place of ***. (Utilize the Copy and Paste options in
the spreadsheet.)

As shown above, only the ***_skate_03 should have a brake. Also,


the only parts that should get a WHEEL_5 are ***_skate_03 and
***_skate_04.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

H-5

Assembly Part FamiliesXess Activity

Choose Part FamilySave Family from the spreadsheet menu


bar.
The spreadsheet data is now complete. There are several
things that you need to know to understand the current
condition of the spreadsheet and why it will work.

Row 1 is automatically filled in with the attributes chosen.

Cell A2 is empty when the part family is created.

The rest of row 2 is filled in with the values represented


in the template part.

Any row not containing a value in column A is ignored.

Empty rows are allowed.

By leaving row two without a part name, it represents the


template part. This may be a desired condition if the template
part does not represent a real part configuration. In this case,
the template includes five wheels and a brake but this is not
actually one of the configurations.
You do not have to create a family member part to
test a configuration. You can use the Verify option to
temporarily generate a family member.
Step 6:

Verify a configuration.
In the Part Families dialog box, click Edit.
Highlight one of the family member rows.
Choose Part FamilyVerify Part.
In the Part Families dialog, click Resume
Verify another configuration, if desired, and exit the
spreadsheet.

Step 7:

H-6

Save and close all parts.

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

mt10040_g NX 5

Index

A
Activity: Replacing Defining
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly
Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Creating a New
Sequence . . . . . . . . . .
Icon Options Bar . . . . . . .
Motion Record Preferences
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Editing a
Sequence . . . . . . . . . .
General Concepts . . . . . . .
Procedure: Creating a
Sequence . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure: Sequence
Playback . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence Navigator . . . . .
Sequence Navigator Popups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence Navigator
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Environment . . . . . .
Assembly Configurations
part families . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Associative Curve Operations . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1-8
1-11
. 1-5
. 1-7
1-10
. 1-9
1-12
. 1-4
. 1-6

Deform Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Deform . . . . . . . .
Activity: Deform Assembly
Activity: Defromable Parts
Assembly Components . . .
Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Components . . . .
Deleting Child Features . . . .
Design Intent
Activity: Design Intent . . .
Documenting Design Intent
Defining Design Intent . . .
Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expression Names . . .
Feature Names . . . . .
Feature Sets . . . . . . .
Layers and Categories
Object Names . . . . . .
Spreadsheets . . . . . . .
Visual Editor . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. B-1
B-16
. B-8
. B-5
. B-4
. B-3
. B-2
5-34

. . 5-36
. . 2-23
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

2-26
2-24
2-25
. 2-1

. . 2-16
. . . 2-2
. . 2-12
. . 2-15
. . . 2-8
. . 2-10
. . . 2-9
. . . 2-3
. . . C-2
. . . 6-2

C
Class Standards . . . . . . .
Layers and Categories
Part Naming . . . . . . .
Roles and Customizing
Setting the Role . . . . .
System Information . .
Cloning
Activity: Cloning . . . .
Assemblies . . . . . . . . .

Clone Action Exceptions


Conflict Resolution . . . .
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log Files . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Tab . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming Exceptions . . . .
NX Manager . . . . . . . . .
Part Selection . . . . . . . .
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

13
14
13
16
17
15

. . . . . . . . 1-13
. . . . . . . . . 1-2

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. . . . . . A-1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

3-2
3-3
3-6
3-5
3-10
. 3-4
. 3-8
. 3-7
. 3-9

E
Edge Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Activity: Blend Overflow
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Activity: Edge Blends . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

Index-1

Index

Activity: Multiple Edge Blends


Activity: Vertices Overflow
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overflow Resolutions and
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure: Constant Radius . .
Rolling Ball Principle . . . . . . .
Selection Steps . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings Group . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit During Update . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Flexibility . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Pads and Pockets . . . . . .
Activity: Editing Pads and
Pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure: Editing Pads and
Pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . 8-12

Newton_Raphson 2D
Non-linear @d Sidel
Iteration . . . . . . .
Optimize 1xN . . . . . .
Regula-Falsi . . . . . . .

. . 8-26
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

8-16
. 8-7
. 8-5
. 8-6
8-21
5-29
5-35
7-24

. . 7-26
. . 7-25

F
Face Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Activity: Face Blending . . . . . . . . 8-34
Activity: Face Blending and Tangency
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Activity: Redefining Blended
Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Attachment Methods . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Dialog box groups . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

. . . . . . 10-5
. . . . . . 10-6
. . . . . . 10-7
. . . . . . 10-3

H
How to Use This Manual . .
Online Help . . . . . . . . . .
Student Guide . . . . . . . .
The Learning Advantage
Workbook . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

11
12
11
12
12

I
Inserting Features
Make Current Feature . . . . . . .
Intersection Curves . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Intersection Curves . .
Procedure: Create Intersection
Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 5-12
. 6-14
. 6-17
. 6-16
. 6-15

J
Join Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Join Curves . . . . . . .
Procedure: Create Join Curves
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

. 6-9
6-12
6-11
6-10

G
General Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Activity: Creating General Pad and
Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
General Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Activity: Creating a Pocket . . . . . . 7-8
Activity: Multiple Face Pockets . . 7-11
Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Other Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Selection Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Goal Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Activity: Optimizing Part
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Goal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Newton_Raphson . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Index-2

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

N
NX Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Expression Range . . . . .
Activity: Mass Properties
(Excel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Mass Properties (Xess)
Activity: Timing Gear (Excel) . .
Activity: Timing Gear (Xess) . . .
Built-in Functions . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Expression . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extracting Expressions . . . . . . .
Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mass Properties Function . . . . .
Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NX Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

. . 9-2
. . 9-9
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

9-21
. F-6
9-12
. F-2
9-17
. 9-4
. 9-8
. 9-3
9-18
. 9-6
. 9-7
9-10

mt10040_g NX 5

Index

Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Part Variations .
Activity: Part Variations_
xess . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Variations . . . . .
Activity: Variations_xess .
Lookup Functions . . . . . .
Procedure: Creating a
Template . . . . . . . . . . .
Workflow: General . . . . . . . . .

. . 11-2
. . 11-5
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

. G-2
11-9
. G-5
11-8

. . 11-4
. . 9-11

O
Out Of Date Features
Overview
Course Description
Intended Audience
Objectives . . . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.. 9
. 10
.. 9
. 10

P
Part Families
assembly configurations . . . . .
Part Interrogation
Feature Associativity . . . . . . .
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . .
Feature Browser . . . . . . .
Object Dependency Graph
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . .
Part Navigator Display . .
Part navigator
Status column . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Project Curves . . . . .
Procedure: Project Curves . . .
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . C-2
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

. 4-2
4-10
. 4-4
. 4-3
. 4-5
. 4-7

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

5-33
. 6-3
. 6-6
. 6-5
. 6-4

Procedure: Reorder Feature . . . .


Replacing Features . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity: Inserting and Replacing
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 5-6
5-13
5-16
5-14

S
Sketch Offset Curves . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Sketch Project Curves . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Activity: Project Curves in a
Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Procedure: Creating Projected
Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29, 6-32
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Spreadsheet
differences between XESS and
Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
extended functionality . . . . . . . . . E-4
functions
expression related . . . . . . . . . E-9
matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
object related . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
point related . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
migrating spreadsheet data . . . . . E-3
Suppress by Expression . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Activity: Suppress by
Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Suppressing components . . . . . . . 11-12
Activity: Suppression . . . . . . . . 11-14
Activity: Suppression_xess . . . . . . G-8
Suppression by Expression . . . . 11-13
W

R
Reordering Features . . . . . . . .
Activity: Reordering Features
Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

5-2
5-7
5-5
5-3

Wrap/Unwrap Curves . . . . .
Activity: Wrap Curves . . .
Procedure: Wrap/Unwrap
Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . 6-21
. . . . . 6-25
. . . . . 6-24
. . . . . 6-22

Associative Parametric Design Student Guide

Index-3

You might also like